Nissan Sentra MY21 www.nissan.com.mx

Nissan Sentra MY21

XML Professional Publisher (XPP)

XML, Professional, Publisher, (XPP)

Tweddle Group

www.nissan.com.mx

Thismanualwaspreparedtohelpyouun-derstandtheoperationandmaintenance ofyourvehiclesothatyoumayenjoymany kilometers (miles) of driving pleasure. Please read through ...

Google Docs
Google Drive
Download [pdf]

File Info : application/pdf, 488 Pages, 5.55MB

Manual Sentra MY21

FOREWORD

READ FIRST--THEN DRIVE SAFELY

This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many kilometers (miles) of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle.
A separate NISSAN Warranty Information booklet explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. A separate maintenance booklet explains details about maintaining and servicing your vehicle.
A NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them.
In addition to factory-installed options, your vehicle may also be equipped with additional accessories installed prior to delivery. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped. It is important that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures, warnings, cautions and instructions concerning proper use of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle and/or accessory. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this Owner's Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS!
Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers! · NEVER drive under the influence of
alcohol or drugs. · ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for conditions. · ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you. · ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat. · ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle. · ALWAYS review this Owner's Manual for important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety, emissions or durability and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all options available on this model. Therefore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design without notice and without obligation.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.

CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

APD1005
If you see this symbol, it means "Do not do this" or "Do not let this happen."
If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration.

BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Clarion, Visteon, and Panasonic.

LRS3256
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIR BAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
For additional information, see "Supplemental air bag warning labels" (P. 1-49).

© Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner's Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.

NISSAN CUSTOMER SERVICE (Mexico only)
Nissan Mexicana, S.A. de C.V. and its network of dealers are willing to respond to the needs you may have regarding your vehicle. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and each and every dealer is our main concern. The dealers are always available to address any service concern you may have.
However, if there is anything a NISSAN dealer cannot solve or if you wish to send your comments, questions or complaints directly to Nissan Mexicana S.A. de C.V., please contact our Customer Service Department by calling the phone numbers provided below or by e-mail.
In order to respond promptly, please provide your full name, address, phone number and all information related to your vehicle (VIN, model, etc.).
Tels. 01 800 9 6 4 7 7 2 6 ( W N I S S A N)
Web page http://www.nissan.com.mx

Table of

Illustrated table of contents

contents

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2

WARNING LIGHTS

Warning light (red)

Name
Brake warning light

Page 2-8

Charge warning 2-9 light

Engine oil pres-

2-9

sure warning light

Master warning light

2-10

Seat belt warning 2-10 light and chime
Supplemental air 2-10 bag warning light

Warning light
(yellow)

Name

Page

Anti-lock Braking 2-11 System (ABS) warning light

Intelligent Emer- 2-11 gency Braking system warning light (if so equipped)
Intelligent Emer- 2-11 gency Braking with Pedestrian
Detection system warning light (if so
equipped)
Low tire pressure 2-12 warning light (if so
equipped)

Master warning light

2-10

Warning light
(yellow)

Name

Page

Power steering 2-14 warning light

Rear Automatic 2-15 Braking (RAB) OFF warning light (if so
equipped)

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Front manual seat adjustment (for passenger's seat and if so equipped for driver's seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3 Front power seat adjustment (if so equipped for driver's seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Adjustable head restraint components . . . . . . . .1-7 Non-adjustable head restraint components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Injured persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18 Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19

Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Child restraint installation using ISOFIX . . . . . . 1-26 Child restraint installation using the seat belts with ALR mode (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30 Child restraint installation using the seat belts without ALR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . 1-49 Precautions on SRS (with NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49 Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64 Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66 SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . 1-68

SEATS

WARNING
· Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

ARS1152
· For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly. For additional information, see "Precautions on seat belt usage" (P. 1-10).
· After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.

1-2 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

· Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.
· To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
· Do not adjust the driver's seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle.
· The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased.

CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT (for passenger's seat and if so equipped for driver's seat)
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For additional information about adjusting the seats, refer to the steps outlined in this section.

LRS3245
Forward and backward
Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.

LRS3246
Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever up and lean your body forward.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

LRS3251
Seat lifter (driver's seat)
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved.
FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped for driver's seat)
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted electronically. For additional information about adjusting the seats, refer to the steps outlined in this section.

Operating tips
· The power seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds then reactivate the switch.
Forward and backward
Moving the switch will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.
Reclining
Move the recline switch until the desired angle is obtained.

LRS2744
Seat lifter
Move the switch as shown to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion.

1-4 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2745
Lumbar support
Move the switch as shown to adjust the seatback lumbar area.

LRS3247
FOLDING REAR SEAT
Pull the knob OA to fold each seatback
down.

· Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
· When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
· Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children's access to car keys.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

HEAD RESTRAINTS

LRS3267
Center armrest (if so equipped)
Pull the armrest down as shown.

WARNING
Head restraints supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjustable head restraints must be adjusted properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks or remove the head restraint. Do not use the seat if the head restraint has been removed. If the head restraint was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision.

· Your vehicle is equipped with a head restraint that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable.
· Adjustable head restraints have multiple notches along the stalk to lock them in a desired adjustment position.
· The non-adjustable head restraints have a single locking notch to secure them to the seat frame.
· Proper Adjustment: For the adjustable type, align the head restraint so the center of your ear is approximately level with the center of the head restraint. If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint at the highest position.
· If the head restraint has been removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and locked in place before riding in that designated seating position.

1-6 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2300
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint 2. Multiple notches 3. Lock knob 4. Stalks

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint 2. Single notch 3. Lock knob 4. Stalks

LRS2299

REMOVE

LRS2302

Use the following procedure to remove the head restraint:

1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position.

INSTALL

LRS2303

1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint is facing the correct direction. The stalk with the notch (notches)
O1 must be installed in the hole with the lock knob O2 .

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position.

WRS0134
ADJUST
For adjustable head restraint
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level with the center of your ears. If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint at the highest position.

1-8 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2351
For non-adjustable head restraint
Make sure the head restraint is positioned from the stored position or any non-latch position so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS2305
Raise
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
Make sure the head restraint is positioned from the stored position or any non-latch position so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS2306
Lower
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down.
Make sure the head restraint is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

SEAT BELTS

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.

SSS0136
Some states, provinces or territories require that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

1-10 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING
· Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be in the rear seats and in an appropriate restraint.

SSS0134

SSS0016
WARNING
· The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

SSS0014
WARNING
· Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never put the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
· Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident.

· Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle.
· Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness.
· Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt.
· Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts.
· If the seat belt warning light glows continuously when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· No changes should be made to the seat belt system. For example, do not modify the seat belt, add material, or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system. Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

· Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have activated, they cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
· All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer's inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged.

1-12 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0786
SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT
The driver's and passenger's front seats are equipped with a seat belt warning light. The rear seats may be equipped with a seat belt warning light. The warning light, located on the instrument panel, will show the status of the seat belts.
NOTE:
The front passenger seat belt warning light will not light up if the seat is not occupied.

For additional information, see "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" (P. 2-7).
NOTE:
The rear seats are equipped with a seat belt warning message in the vehicle information display.
For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P. 2-17).
PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
· Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be in the rear seats and in an appropriate restraint.
· Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.
· For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

· Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (if so equipped) seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child's neck with the ALR mode (if so equipped) activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.

LRS3245
Manual front seat shown (if so equipped)
Fastening the seat belts

1-14 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Power front seat shown (if so equipped) 1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa-
tion, see "Seats" (P. 1-2).

LRS2662

LRS2674
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle
OA until you hear and feel the latch
engage.
· The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat.
· If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

passengers some freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts.

The ALR mode (if so equipped) (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation.

LRS2675
3. Position the lap belt portion low and
snug on the hips OB as shown.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack OC . Be
sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest.

When the ALR mode (if so equipped) is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-20).
The ALR mode (if so equipped) should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode (if so equipped) should not be activated. If it is activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions three-point seat belts have two modes of operation: · Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) · Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) (if so
equipped)
The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and

WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

1-16 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0139
Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button
on the buckle O1 . The seat belt automati-
cally retracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods: · When the seat belt is pulled quickly from
the retractor · When the vehicle slows down rapidly

To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows:
· Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check, get the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service or to learn more about seat belt operation.

LRS0242
Shoulder belt height adjustment (front seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. For additional information, see "Precautions on seat belt usage" (P. 1-10). To adjust, pull out
the adjustment button O1 and move the
shoulder belt anchor to the desired posi-
tion O2 , so the belt passes over the center
of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

WARNING
· After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position.
· The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap/ shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available for purchase. The extender adds approximately 200 mm (8 in) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

CHILD SAFETY

WARNING
· Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, should be used with NISSAN seat belts.
· Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.
· Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision or a sudden stop.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
· To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.
· If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

· Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components, such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.

Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child.
There are three basic types of child restraint systems:
· Rear-facing child restraint
· Front-facing child restraint
· Booster seat
The proper restraint depends on the child's size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year old and less than 9 kg (20 lbs.) should be placed in rear-facing child restraints. Front-facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/ shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a front-facing child restraint.

1-18 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle's seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.
Some states, provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-20).
Also, there are other types of child restraints available for larger children for additional protection.
NISSAN recommends that child restraints be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. This is especially important because your vehicle may have a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the front passenger. For additional information, see "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)" (P. 1-49).

INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recommends that infants and small children be placed in child restraints. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.
SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least 9 kg (20 lbs.) should remain in a rear-facing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-facing child restraint and are at least 1 year old should be secured in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness until they reach the maximum height or weight limit allowed by the child restraint manufacturer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit of the harness-equipped forwardfacing child restraint, NISSAN recommends that the child be placed in a commercially available booster seat to obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the chest and the top, middle portion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross the neck or face and should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly across the lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck and the lap belt can be positioned properly across the lower hips or upper thighs use the seat belt without the booster seat.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

CHILD RESTRAINTS
WARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving. The child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident or sudden stop.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS

ARS1098

WARNING
· Infants and small children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint can result in serious injury or death.

WRS0256
WARNING
· Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself.

1-20 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

· Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.
· All child restraints should be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If you must install a front facing child restraint in the front seat, see "Child restraint installation using the seat belts with ALR mode" (P. 1-30) and "Child restraint installation using the seat belts with ELR mode" (P. 1-37).
· Improper use or improper installation of a child restraint can increase the risk or severity of injury for both the child and other occupants of the vehicle and can lead to serious injury or death in an accident.

· Follow all of the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of child restraints in your vehicle.
· If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases.
· Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit the child restraint, but as upright as possible.
· After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the seat near the ISOFIX attachment or by the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 25 mm (1 inch), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

· When your child restraint is not in use, keep it secured with the ISOFIX system or a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident.
CAUTION
Remember that a child restraint left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the ISOFIX system. Some child restraints include two rigid or webbingmounted attachments that can be connected to these lower anchors. For additional information, see "ISOFIX system" (P. 1-23).
If you do not have a ISOFIX compatible child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used. For additional information, see "Child restraint installation using the seat belts with ALR mode" (P. 1-30) and "Child restraint installation using the seat belts with ELR mode" (P. 1-37). In general, child restraints

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

are also designed to be installed with a lap/shoulder seat belt.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and small children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind:
· Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's seat and seat belt system.
· If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child's height and weight. Always follow all recommended procedures.
· Refer to the tables later in this section for a list of the recommended fitment position and the approved child restraints for your vehicle.
Some states, provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.

LRS2779
Example of child safety seat categories 0 and 0+
Mass group of child restraint

Mass group Group 0 Group 0+ Group I Group II Group III

Child's weight up to 10 kg up to 13 kg 9 to 18 kg 15 to 25 kg 22 to 36 kg

LRS2780
Example of child safety seat categories 0+ and I

1-22 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2781
Example of child safety seat categories II and III

LRS3268
ISOFIX system lower anchor location
ISOFIX SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with ISOFIX system compatible child restraints. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint.
The ISOFIX anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the rear seat outer positions (left and right) only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint in the center position using the ISOFIX anchors.

WRS0700
ISOFIX lower anchor locations
ISOFIX lower anchor point locations
The ISOFIX anchors are located as shown. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the ISOFIX anchors.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

WARNING
· Attach ISOFIX system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown. If a child restraint is not secured properly, your child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident.
· Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the ISOFIX system anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly.
· Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorages, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

LRS0662
ISOFIX rigid-mounted attachment
Installing child restraint ISOFIX anchor attachments
ISOFIX-compatible child restraints include two rigid attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with the ISOFIX system. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

ISOFIX child restraints generally require the use of a top tether strap. For additional information on installation instructions, see "Top tether strap child restraint" (P. 1-43).
When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint. For additional information, see "Child restraint installation using ISOFIX" (P. 1-26).
Child restraint installation positions using i-Size
The following restriction is applied when using child restraints varying by infants weight and installation position.

1-24 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seating position

Front passenger seat front Front passenger seat front

airbag ON

airbag OFF

2nd row outboard seats

2nd row center seat

i-Size child restraint systems

i-U*1,*2

X: Seat position not suitable for i-Size "universal" child restraint systems. i-U: Suitable for i-Sized "universal" child restraint systems, forward and rearward facing. *1: Move the head restraint to the uppermost position or, if necessary, remove it in case of any interference with the child restraint. Do not remove head restraint when using a booster cushion only. *2: Adjust the front seat(s) slide position sufficiently forward and/or the seat height adjustment (if available) to the uppermost position to ensure there is no contact between child restraint and back of front seat.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING ISOFIX
WARNING
· Attach ISOFIX system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown. For the ISOFIX lower anchor locations, see to "ISOFIX system" (P. 1-23) . If a child restraint is not secured properly, your child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident.

· Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstance are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses or attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

· Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area and feeling to make sure there are no obstructions over the ISOFIX anchors, such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the ISOFIX anchors are obstructed.
This is a regulatory table, indicating ISOFIX and semi-universally approved child restraint for various approved seating positions.

Mass group

Front Passenger

Seating Position*1 2nd Row Outboard (LH)*2 2nd Row Outboard (RH)*2

2nd Row Center

Group 0

<10 kg

Group 0+

<13 kg

Group I

9 - 18 kg

Group II

15 - 25 kg

Group III

22 - 36 kg

X: Position not suitable for installation of ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) in these seating positions. IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward-facing CRS of the "universal" category approved for use in the mass group. IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX CRS given on the CRS manufacturer's website, or "semi-universal" categories. *1: Remove and securely stow the head restraint of the passenger seat when a forward-facing child restraint is fitted. Where a head restraint cannot be removed, adjust the height of the head restraint so that there is no interference with the child restraint. Note that head restraints on some vehicles are fixed. These head restraints do not interfere with the child seat installation. *2: Adjust front seat (slider, lifter, seatback) to accommodate the child's legs and the child restraint *3: Adjust the second-row seat (slider, lifter, seat back) to accommodate the child's legs and the child restraint.

1-26 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Forward-facing
Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the ISOFIX system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the child restraint is removed.
If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

LRS0662
Forward-facing rigid-mounted step 2 2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-
tachments to the ISOFIX lower anchors. Check to make sure the ISOFIX attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.
3. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. For additional information, see "Head restraints" (P. 1-6).
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 6.
Rear-facing
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the ISOFIX system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

LRS0671
Forward-facing step 4 4. Press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.
5. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. For additional information, see "Top tether strap child restraint" (P. 1-43).
Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap to seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

WRS0697
Forward-facing step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the seat near the ISOFIX attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 25 mm (1 inch) from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the ISOFIX attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the ISOFIX attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-28 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2013
Rear-facing rigid-mounted step 2 2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-
tachments to the ISOFIX lower anchors. Check to make sure the ISOFIX attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

LRS0673
Rear-facing step 3
3. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

LRS2014
Rear-facing step 4
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the seat near the ISOFIX attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 25 mm (1 inch) from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the ISOFIX attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the ISOFIX attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 4.

WRS0256
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS WITH ALR MODE (if so equipped)
WARNING
· Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.

· All child restraints should be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat
· The three-point seat belt in your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which must be used when installing a child restraint.
· Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision
· A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat.
This is a regulatory table, indicating seat belt and universally approved child restraints for various approved seating positions.

1-30 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Mass group

Front Passenger

Seating position*1 2nd Row Outboard (LH) *2 2nd Row Outboard (RH) *2 2nd Row Center

Group 0 up to 10 kg

Group 0+ up to 13 kg

Group I 9 to 18 kg

Group II 15 to 25 kg

Group III 22 to 36 kg

U: Suitable for "universal" category restraints, forward and rearward facing, approved for use in this mass group UF: Suitable for forward-facing "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group L: Suitable for particular child restraints given on the child restraint manufacturer's website, or "semi-universal" categories. X: Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group. *1: Remove and securely stow the head restraint of the passenger seat when a forward-facing child restraint is fitted. Where a head restraint cannot be removed, adjust the height of the head restraint so that there is no interference with the child restraint. Note that head restraints on some vehicles are fixed. These head restraints do not interfere with the child seat installation. *2: Adjust front seat (slider, lifter, seatback) to accommodate the child's legs and the child restraint. *3: Adjust the second-row seat (slider, lifter, seat back) to accommodate the child's legs and the child restraint.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. For additional information, see "Head restraints" (P. 1-6).

WRS0699
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) step 1
Forward-facing
Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat.

1-32 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0680
Forward-facing step 3 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). For additional information, see "Installing top tether strap" (P. 1-44).
Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

LRS0667
Forward-facing step 4 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

LRS0668
Forward-facing step 5 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

WRS0681
Forward-facing step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

WRS0698
Forward-facing step 7 7. If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). For additional information, see "Top tether strap child restraint" (P. 1-43).
Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap to seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the seat near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 25 mm (1 inch) side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
9. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more seat belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the ALR mode.
10. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 4 through 9.

1-34 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS3258

11. If the child restraint is installed on the

front passenger seat, push the power

switch to the ON position. The front pas-

senger air bag OFF status light

should illuminate. If the front passenger

airbag ON light

illuminates or no

light illuminates, see "Front passenger

air bag and status light" (P. 1-59). Move

the child restraint to another seating

position. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

Rear-facing step 1
Rear-facing

WRS0256

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and, therefore, must not be used in the front seat. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

WRS0682
Rear-facing step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the
buckle O2 until you hear and feel the
latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for belt routing.

LRS0669
Rear-facing step 3
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

LRS0670
Rear-facing step 4 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

WRS0762
Rear-facing step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the child restraint; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

WRS0763
Rear-facing step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the seat near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 25 mm (1 inch) from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-36 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

7. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more seat belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the ALR mode.
8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 7.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.
WRS0256
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS WITHOUT ALR
WARNING
· Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

This is a regulatory table, indicating seat belt and universally approved child restraints for various approved seating positions.

Mass group

Front Passenger

Seating position*1 2nd Row Outboard (LH) *2 2nd Row Outboard (RH) *2 2nd Row Center

Group 0 up to 10 kg

Group 0+ up to 13 kg

Group I 9 to 18 kg

Group II 15 to 25 kg

Group III 22 to 36 kg

U: Suitable for "universal" category restraints, forward and rearward facing, approved for use in this mass group UF: Suitable for forward-facing "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group L: Suitable for particular child restraints given on the child restraint manufacturer's website, or "semi-universal" categories. X: Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group. *1 Remove and securely stow the head restraint of the passenger seat when a forward-facing child restraint is fitted. Where a head restraint cannot be removed, adjust the height of the head restraint so that there is no interference with the child restraint. Note that head restraints on some vehicles are fixed. These head restraints do not interfere with the child seat installation. *2: Adjust front seat (slider, lifter, seatback) to accommodate the child's legs and the child restraint. *3 Adjust the second-row seat (slider, lifter, seat back) to accommodate the child's legs and the child restraint.

1-38 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0699
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) step 1
Forward-facing
For additional information, see all Warnings and Cautions in the "Child safety" (P. 1-18) and "Child restraints" (P. 1-20) before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move

the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and, therefore, must not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the child restraint is removed. For additional information about head restraint adjustment, removal and installation, see "Head restraints" (P. 1-6).
If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

6. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2 through 5.

SSS0513
Forward-facing step 4
4. To prevent slack in the lap belt, it will be necessary to secure the shoulder belt in
place with a locking clip OA . Use a lock-
ing clip attached to the child restraint system, or one which is equivalent in dimensions and strength.
Be sure to follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions for belt routing.

WRS0698
Forward-facing step 5
5. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 25 mm (1 inch), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-40 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Rear-facing
For additional information, see all Warnings and Cautions in the "Child safety" (P. 1-18) and "Child restraints" (P. 1-20) before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats:

LRS3258

Forward-facing step 6

7. If the child restraint is installed on the

front passenger seat, push the power

switch to the ON position. The front pas-

senger air bag OFF status light

should illuminate. If the front passenger

airbag ON light

illuminates or no

light illuminates, see "Front passenger air

bag and status light" (P. 1-59). Move the

child restraint to another seating posi-

tion. Have the system checked. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

WRS0256
Rear-facing step 1 1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

WRS0761
Rear-facing step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for belt routing.

SSS0513
Rear-facing step 3
3. To prevent slack in the lap belt, it will be necessary to secure the shoulder belt in
place with a locking clip OA . Use a locking
clip attached to the child restraint system, or one which is equivalent in dimensions and strength.
Be sure to follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions for belt routing.

WRS0762
Rear-facing step 4
4. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

1-42 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

6. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 5.
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT
If the manufacturer of your child restraint requires the use of a top tether strap, it must be secured to the anchor point.

WRS0763
Rear-facing step 5
5. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 25 mm (1 inch) from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

LRS3335
Top tether anchor point locations
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the ISOFIX lower anchor attachments or seat belts. For additional information, see "Installing top tether strap" (P. 1-44).
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap child restraint, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Anchor points O1 are located on the rear
parcel shelf.
Installing top tether strap
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

First, secure the child restraint with the ISOFIX system (rear outboard seats only) or seat belt, as applicable.
1. Flip up the anchor cover from the anchor point which is located directly behind the child seat.
2. Position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor bracket that provides the straightest installation.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
BOOSTER SEATS
For additional information on installing a booster seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions outlined in this section.

ARS1098
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
· Infants and small children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint or booster seat can result in serious injury or death.

1-44 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

· Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself.
· NISSAN recommends that the booster seat be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, see "Booster seat installation" (P. 1-47).
· A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap/ shoulder belt. Failure to use a threepoint type seat belt with a booster seat can result in a serious injury in sudden stop or collision.
· Improper use or improper installation of a booster seat can increase the risk or severity of injury for both the child and other occupants of the vehicle and can lead to serious injury or death in an accident.

· Do not use towels, books, pillows or other items in place of a booster seat. Items such as these may move during normal driving or a collision and result in serious injury or death. Booster seats are designed to be used with a lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are designed to properly route the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt over the strongest portions of a child's body to provide the maximum protection during a collision.
· Follow all of the booster seat manufacturer's instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a booster seat, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of booster seats in your vehicle.
· If the booster seat and seat belt is not used properly, the risk of a child being injured or killed in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases.
· Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit the booster seat, but as upright as possible.

· After placing the child in the booster seat and fastening the seat belt, make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child's face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the abdomen.
· Do not put the shoulder belt behind the child or under the child's arm. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, see "Booster seat installation" (P. 1-47).
· When your booster seat is not in use, keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident.
CAUTION
Remember that a booster seat left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the booster seat.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

LRS2479
A. Low back booster seat
B. High back booster seat Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind: · Check the booster seat in your vehicle to
be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's seat and seat belt system.

LRS0453
· Make sure the child's head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or above the center of the child's ears. For example, if a low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child's ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of the child's ears, a high back booster seat should be used.

LRS0464
· If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with your child. Choose a booster seat that is designed for your child's height and weight. Always follow all recommended procedures.
The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat.

1-46 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Some states, provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.
Booster seat installation

WARNING
All booster seats should be installed in the rear seat. However, if you must install a booster seat in the front passenger seat, move the passenger's seat to the rearmost position.
To avoid injury to child, do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) (if so equipped) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the "Child safety" (P. 1-18) and "Child restraints" (P. 1-20) and "Booster seats" (P. 1-47) sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.

WRS0699
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a front-facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.

LRS0454
Front passenger position

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

Rear center position

LRS0451

LRS0452
Rear outboard position 3. The booster seat should be positioned
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the booster seat is removed. For additional information, see "Head restraints" (P. 1-6).

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat.

1-48 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child's hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child's shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in "Three-point type seat belt with retractor" (P. 1-13).

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

LRS3258
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat, place the power switch in the ON position. Either the front passenger ON or OFF air bag status light will illuminate, depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat being used. For additional information, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-59).

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS (with NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)
This SRS section contains important information concerning the following systems:
· Driver and front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)
· Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
· Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag
· Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)
Supplemental front-impact air bag system
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
The SRS is designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. For additional information about instructions and precautions on seat belt usage, see "Seat belts" (P. 1-10)
The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

WARNING
· The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.
· The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status OFF light is lit. For additional information, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-59).
1-50 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0031

· The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always properly use the seat belts.
· The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage, then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

· The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. For additional information, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-59).
· Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates.
· Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury.

ARS1133

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

ARS1041
WARNING
· Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

ARS1042
WARNING
· Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Preteens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

1-52 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ARS1043

ARS1044

ARS1045

ARS1046
WARNING
· Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-20).

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

WRS0431
WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roofmounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bags: · The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.
1-54 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS3119

WARNING
· The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations.

WRS0032
WARNING
· When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.
· Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation.

SSS0162

SSS0159

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (front seats)

1. Top tether anchor 2. Rear seat belts

1-56 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2774

3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag
4. Head restraints
5. Front seat belts
6. Supplemental front-impact air bags
7. Front crash zone sensor
8. Pressure sensors in door (front passenger side shown; driver's side similar)
9. Front seats
10. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor)
11. Satellite sensor (front passenger side shown; driver's side similar)
12. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)
13. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
14. Rear seats
15. ISOFIX system
16. Satellite sensor (front passenger side shown; driver's side similar)

WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger's NISSAN Advanced Air bag System, please observe the following items.
· Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket.
· Do not place heavy loads heavier than 4 kg (9.1 lbs.) on the seatback, head restraint or in the seatback pocket.
· Make sure that there is nothing pressing against the rear of the seatback, such as a child restraint installed in the rear seat or an object stored on the floor.
· Make sure that there is no object placed under the front passenger seat.
· Make sure that there is no object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.

· If a forward-facing child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, do not position the front passenger seat so the child restraint contacts the instrument panel. If the child restraint does contact the instrument panel, the system may determine the seat is occupied and the passenger air bag may deploy in a collision. Also the front passenger air bag status OFF light may not illuminate. For additional information about installing and using child restraints, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-20).
· Confirm the operating condition with the front passenger air bag status lights.
· If you notice that the front passenger air bag status lights are not operating as described in this section, get the occupant classification system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· Until you have confirmed with a dealer that your passenger seat occupant classification system is working properly, position the occupants in the rear seating positions.

· Do not position the front passenger seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the front seat does contact the rear seat, the air bag system may determine a sensor malfunction has occurred and the front passenger air bag status lights may illuminate and the supplemental air bag warning light may flash.
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag system operation.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU). Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the occupant classification sensor is also monitored. Based on information from the sensor, only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag may be automatically turned off under some conditions, depending on the weight detected on the front passenger seat and how the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the front passenger air bag status OFF light will be illuminated. For additional information, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-59). One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air bag system, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information about the system. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner's Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and front passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the front air bag module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

1-58 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child restraints is necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

LRS3258
Front passenger air bag and status light

CONDITION Empty
Nobody/ Somebody
Adult

DESCRIPTION Empty front passenger seat Bag or Child or Child Restraint or Small Adult in front passenger seat Adult in the front passenger seat

PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS LIGHT Air bag OFF (illuminated) Air bag OFF (illuminated) Air bag ON (illuminated)

In addition to the above, certain objects placed on the front passenger seat may also cause the lights to operate as described above depending on their weight.

For additional information, see "Normal operation" (P. 1-61) and "Troubleshooting" (P. 1-62).

Status light

The front passenger seat is equipped with

an occupant classification sensor (weight

sensor) that turns the front passenger air

bag on or off depending on the weight ap-

plied to the front passenger seat. The sta-

tus of the front passenger air bag (ON or

OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air

bag status lights

and

which are

located on the instrument panel.

After the ignition switch is placed in the "ON" position, the front passenger air bag status lights on the instrument panel illuminate for about 7 seconds and then turn off or remain illuminated depending on the front passenger seat occupied status. The lights operate as follows:

FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS INHIBITED INHIBITED ACTIVATED

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with Latin American regulations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements.
The occupant classification sensor in this vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat by weight. For example, if a child is in the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the front passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, its weight and the child's weight can be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the front passenger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear seat. NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant classification sensor is designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the ALR mode (if so equipped) may allow the restraint to tip or move in a collision or sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. For additional informa-

1-60 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

tion about proper use and installation, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-20).
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the front passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation, because of the object's weight detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is standing on the seat, or if two children are on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual. Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.
Using the front passenger air bag status light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the front passenger air bag status OFF light (
) is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, the front passenger air bag status OFF light ( ) may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. If

the air bag status OFF light ( ) is not illuminated but the air bag ON status light (
) is illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly, the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air bag status OFF light ( ) is still not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
If the front passenger air bag status OFF light ( ) will not illuminate even though you believe that the child restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned, it is recommended that you take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can check system status by using a special tool. However, until you have confirmed with a dealer that your air bag is working properly, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and front passenger air bag status lights will take a few seconds to register a change in the front passenger seat status. This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-

ger air bag system, the supplemental air

bag warning light

, located in the me-

ter and gauges area of the instrument

panel, will be illuminated (blinking or

steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Normal operation

In order for the occupant classification sensor system to classify the front passenger based on weight, please follow the precautions and steps outlined below:

Precautions
· Make sure that there are no objects weighing over 4 kg (9.1 lbs.) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.
· Make sure that a child restraint or other object is not pressing against the rear of the seatback.
· Make sure that a rear passenger is not pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
· Make sure that the front passenger seat or seatback is not forced back against an object on the seat or floor behind it.

· Make sure that there is no object placed under the front passenger seat.
Steps
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the "Seats" (P. 1-2) section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with your feet comfortably extended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the "Seat belts" (P. 1-10) section of this manual. Front passenger seat belt buckle status is monitored by the occupant classification system, and is used as an input to determine occupancy status. So, it is highly recommended that the front passenger fasten their seat belt.
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds allowing the system to classify the front passenger before the vehicle is put into motion.
5. Ensure proper classification by checking the front passenger air bag status lights.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

NOTE:
This vehicle's occupant classification sensor system generally keeps the classification locked during driving, so it is important that you confirm that the front passenger is properly classified prior to driving. However, the occupant classification sensor may recalculate the weight of the occupant under some conditions (both while driving and when stopped), so front passenger seat occupants should continue to remain seated as outlined above.
Troubleshooting
If you think the front passenger air bag status light is incorrect:
1. If the OFF light ( ) is ON with an adult occupying the front passenger seat:
· Occupant is a small adult -- the air bag light is functioning as intended. The front passenger air bag is suppressed.
However, if the occupant is not a small adult, then this may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:

· Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
· A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.
· A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
· Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
· An object placed under the front passenger seat.
· An object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status lights will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.

1-62 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the OFF light ( ) is ON after this, the person should be advised not to ride in the front passenger seat and the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2. If the ON light ( ) is ON with a small adult, child or child restraint occupying the front passenger seat.
This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:
· Small adult or child is not sitting upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
· The child restraint is not properly installed, as outlined in the "Child restraints" (P. 1-20) section of this manual.
· An object weighing over 4 kg (9.1 lbs.) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.
· A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.
· A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
· Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it.

· An object placed under the front passenger seat.
· An object placed between the seat cushion and center console.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status lights will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.
If the ON light ( ) is ON after this, the small adult, child or child restraint should be repositioned in the rear seat and the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
3. If the ON light ( ) is ON with no front passenger and no objects on the front passenger seat, the vehicle should be checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Other supplemental front-impact air bag precautions
WARNING
· Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate.
· Immediately after inflation, several front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
· No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system.
· Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system.

· Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system.
· Removing or modifying the front passenger seat may affect the function of the air bag and result in serious personal injury.
· Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, on the seat that are not specifically designed to assure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensor (weight sensor).

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

· No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may affect the front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.
· It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the front air bag system. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system.
· A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

1-64 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0259
FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IMPACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-IMPACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
The side air bags are located within the outboard side of the front seatback. The curtain air bags are located in the side roof rails. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual must be followed. The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision

are similar to those of a higher severity impact. They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation.
When the side air bags and curtain air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest of the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag and curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front and rear outboard occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bag and curtain air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bags and curtain air bags will deflate quickly after the collision is over.
The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING
· Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflates.
· Right after inflation, several side air bag and curtain air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
· No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag or damage to the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
· Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65

· Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag.
· It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the side air bag and curtain air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or curtain air bag systems.
* The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bag and curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

SEAT BELT WITH PRETENSIONER(s) (front seats)
WARNING
· The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused after activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit.
· If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but pretensioner(s) are not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury.

· It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the pretensioner system. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system.
· If you need to dispose of the pretensioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.
The pretensioner system may activate with the supplemental air bag system in certain types of collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.
The pretensioner(s) are encased within the seat belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor affixed to the floor of the vehicle. These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts.

1-66 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
After the pretensioner(s') activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning light is used to indicate malfunctions in the
pretensioner system. For additional information, see "Supplemental air bag warning light" (P. 1-68). If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is a malfunction, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

LRS2054
1. SRS air bag warning labels (located on the sun visors)
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental front-impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
The label(s) warn you not to fit a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat as such a restraint system used in this position could cause serious injury to the infant in case of an air bag deployment during a collision.

The label design varies depending on the model.
WARNING
Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it!

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67

When installing a child restraint system in your vehicle, always follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions for installation. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-20).

The label warns:

LRS3256

WARNING
"NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIR BAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur."
In vehicles equipped with a front-impact passenger air bag system, use a rearfacing child restraint system only in the rear seats.

1-68 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0100

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying

in the instrument panel,

monitors the circuits for the air bag sys-

tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing: · The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds. · The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. · The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Repair and replacement procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred. These systems should be repaired and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition switch should always be placed in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING
· Once a front air bag, side air bag, or curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, the activated pretensioner(s) must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner(s) should be replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. However, the air bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot be repaired.
· The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be inspected if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· If you need to dispose of the supplemental air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69

· If there is an impact to your vehicle from any direction, your occupant classification sensor should be checked to verify it is still functioning correctly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) should be checked even if no air bags deploy as a result of the impact. Failure to verify proper occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) function may result in an improper air bag deployment resulting in injury or death.
1-70 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

MEMO
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-71

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Warning/Indicator lights (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Warning/Indicator lights (yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11 Warning/Indicator lights (other) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
How to use the vehicle information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Vehicle information display warnings and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type B (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
How to use the vehicle information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Resetting the drive computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Vehicle information display warnings and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defogger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Manual headlight aiming control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . . 2-60
Dynamic driver assistance switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61

Rear Door Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 Emergency call (SOS) button (if so equipped) . . . 2-63 Power outlet (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65

Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68 Power moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/ turn signal switch (P. 2-52, 2-59)
2. Steering wheel switch (P. 2-17, 2-32) Audio controls (P. 4-42)
2-2 Instruments and controls

5. Cruise control switches (if so equipped)

(P. 5-58) Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-60) Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

(P. 4-2) 6. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-51) 7. Vents (P. 4-34) 8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2) 9. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-49) 10. Audio system (P. 4-42) 11. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-49) 12. Shift lever (P. 5-15) 13. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-10) 14. Climate controls (P. 4-34, 4-38) 15. Tilt/Telescopic steering (P. 3-21) 16. Hood release (P. 3-17) 17. Fuel filler door release (P. 3-19) 18. ECO mode switch (P. 5-22)
Instrument brightness control (P. 2-52) Trunk release (P. 3-18) Trip Reset Switch (P. 2-3) Manual headlight aiming control

(if so equipped) (P. 2-57) Dynamic driver assistance switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-61) LIC4385 For additional information, refer to the

3. Driver's supplemental air bag (P. 1-49)

separate NissanConnect® Owner's Manual.

4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

Warning and indicators lights (P. 2-7)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

METERS AND GAUGES
1. Tachometer 2. Warning and indicator lights 3. Vehicle information display 4. Speedometer 5. Fuel gauge 6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and odometer. The speedometer is located on the right side of the meter cluster. The odometer is located within the vehicle information display.
LIC4212
Instruments and controls 2-3

LIC4655
4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A (if so equipped)
Odometer/Twin trip odometer

LIC4656
7 inch (18 cm) Type B (if so equipped)
The odometer O2 and the twin trip odometer O1 are displayed when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
Changing the display
Push the TRIP/RESET switch (located on the instrument panel) to change the display as follows:
TRIP A TRIP B ODO TRIP A

LIC4335
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
Do not rev the engine into the red zone O1 .
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce engine speed. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

2-4 Instruments and controls

LIC3427
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be placed in the ON position for the gauge to give a reading.
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range when the
reading is within the zone OA shown in the
illustration.

CAUTION
If the gauge indicates a coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease the temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. For additional information, see "If your vehicle overheats" (P. 6-11).

FUEL GAUGE

LIC2222

NOTE:

The ignition switch must be placed in the ON position for the gauge to give a reading.
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank.
The low fuel warning light comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
The arrow on the fuel pump symbol indicates the fuel-filler location.

Instruments and controls 2-5

CAUTION
· If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips. the light should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· For additional information, see "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" (P. 2-13).
DISTANCE TO EMPTY (DTE)
Displays the estimated distance the vehicle can be driven before refueling. The value is calculated based on recent fuel economy, the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank, and the actual fuel consumption.
Changes in driving patterns or conditions can cause the DTE value to vary. As a result, the value displayed may differ from the actual distance that can be driven.
DTE display will change to "---" when the fuel level in the tank is getting low, prior to the fuel gauge reaching 0 (Empty).

NOTE:
· The DTE value after refill is estimated based on recent fuel economy and amount of fuel added.
· If a small amount of fuel is added, or the ignition is on during refueling, the display may not be updated.
· Conditions that affect the fuel economy will also affect the estimated DTE value (city/highway driving, idle time, remote start time, terrain, seasonal weather, added vehicle weight, added deflectors, roof racks, etc.).

2-6 Instruments and controls

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Warning/Indicator light (red)
Brake warning light Charge warning light Engine oil pressure warning light Master warning light Seat belt warning light and chime
Supplemental air bag warning light

Warning/Indicator light (yellow)
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light
Front passenger air bag status light
Front passenger air bag status light
Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light (if so equipped)
Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (if so equipped)
Low tire pressure warning light (if so equipped)
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Master warning light
Power steering warning light

Warning/Indicator light (other)
Drive sport mode indicator light (green) (if so equipped) ECO mode indicator light (green) Front fog light indicator light (green) (if so equipped) High Beam Assist indicator light (green) (if so equipped) High beam indicator light (blue)
Side light and headlight indicator light (green) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights (green)

Instruments and controls 2-7

Warning/Indicator light (red)

Warning/Indicator light (yellow)

Warning/Indicator light (other)

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) OFF warning light (if so equipped)

Slip indicator light

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake, fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights (if so equipped) will come on:

The following lights (if so equipped) will come on briefly and then go off:

If any light does not come on or operate in a way other than described, it may indicate a burned-out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Some indicators and warnings are also displayed on the vehicle information display between the speedometer and tachometer. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A" (P. 2-17) or "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type B" (P. 2-32)
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (red)
For additional information on warnings and indicators, see "Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A" (P. 2-17) or "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type B" (P. 2-32).

Brake warning light
This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems. Parking brake indicator When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied.

2-8 Instruments and controls

Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. For additional information, see "Brake fluid" (P. 8-10).
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
· Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous.

· Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
· If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, or missing, or if the light remains on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION
· Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. For additional information, see "Variable voltage control system" (P. 8-14).
· Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing.
Engine oil pressure warning light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level.

Instruments and controls 2-9

CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.
Master warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the master warning light illuminates if any of the following are displayed on the vehicle information display: · Parking brake release warning · Door open (when vehicle is moving)
warning · Service CVT warning · Shift to P (Park) warning
For additional information, see "Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A" (P. 2-17) or "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type B" (P. 2-32).

Seat belt warning light and chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON position and remains illuminated until the driver's seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime will sound when your vehicle has reached 15 km/h (9 mph) and the driver's seat belt is not fastened. The chime will sound for approximately 95 seconds before automatically turning off.
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passenger's seat belt is not fastened when the front passenger's seat is occupied. For 7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the system does not activate the warning light for the front passenger.
The rear seats are also equipped with a seat belt warning light.
For additional information, see "Seat belts" (P. 1-10).

Supplemental air bag warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and pretensioner seat belt systems need servicing.
· The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
· The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.
· The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services. Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pretensioners may not function properly. For additional information, see "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)" (P. 1-49).

2-10 Instruments and controls

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag systems and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (yellow)
For additional information on warnings and indicators, see "Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A" (P. 2-17) or "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type B" (P. 2-32).
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the ABS warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning

properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates normally but without antilock assistance. For additional information, see "Brake system" (P. 5-135).
Front passenger air bag status light
The front passenger air bag status light will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be off depending on how the front passenger seat is being used.
For additional information, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-59).
Front passenger air bag status light
The front passenger air bag status light will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be on depending on how the front passenger seat is being used.
For additional information, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-59).

Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light (if so equipped)
This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started.
This light illuminates when the Intelligent Emergency Braking system is set to OFF in the vehicle information display.
If the light illuminates when the Intelligent Emergency Braking system is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, see "Intelligent Emergency Braking" (P. 5-91).
Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (if so equipped)
This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started.
This light illuminates when the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system is set to OFF in the vehicle information display.

Instruments and controls 2-11

If the light illuminates when the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, see "Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-101).
Low tire pressure warning light (if so equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the warning light will illuminate. The "Tire Pressure Low Add Air" appears in the vehicle information display.
When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all four tires to the

recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire placard located in the driver's door opening. The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 25 km/h (16 mph) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.
The "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.
For additional information, see "Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A" (P. 2-17) or "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type B" (P. 2-32) or "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5) or (P. 6-3).
TPMS malfunction
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The "Tire Pressure Low-- Add Air" warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
For additional information, see "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5) or (P. 8-29).
WARNING
· Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
· If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch placed in the ON position, have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2-12 Instruments and controls

· If the light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury or death. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the tire placard located in the driver's door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

· When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.
· Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
CAUTION
· The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly.
· If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 25 km/h (16 mph), the TPMS may not operate correctly.
· Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the four wheels correctly.

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction.

The MIL may also come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 11.4 liters (3 gallons) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the

light

should turn off if no other potential emis-

sion control system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection/maintenance test.

Instruments and controls 2-13

Operation

The MIL will come on in one of two ways:

· MIL on steady -- An emission control sys-

tem malfunction has been detected.

Check the fuel-filler cap if the Loose Fuel

Cap warning appears in the vehicle infor-

mation display. If the fuel-filler cap is loose

or missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle. The

light should turn off after a few driving

trips. If the

light does not turn off

after a few driving trips, have the vehicle

inspected. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You

do not need to have your vehicle towed

to the dealer.

· MIL blinking -- An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage: do not drive at speeds above 72 km/h (45 mph). avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. avoid steep uphill grades. if possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed.

The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor drivability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system.
Master warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the master warning light illuminates if any of the following are displayed on the vehicle information display: · Low washer fluid warning (if so equipped) · Loose fuel cap warning · Low tire pressure warning · Emergency brake warning · Lock warning · Shipping mode warning · Door/Trunk open warning
(when vehicle is moving)

· LED Headlight system warning · Chassis Control System Error warning
(if so equipped) · I-Key system warnings · Service CVT warnings · Service engine warnings · Rear emergency braking warning
(if so equipped) · Parking sensor error warning · Driver Attention Alert warning
(if so equipped) · ITS system malfunction warning
For additional information, see "Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A" (P. 2-17) or "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type B" (P. 2-32).
Power steering warning light
WARNING
· If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate.

2-14 Instruments and controls

· When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering. You will still have control of the vehicle but the steering will be harder to operate. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the power steering warning light illuminates. After starting the engine, the power steering warning light turns off. This indicates the power steering system is operational.
If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering but you will still have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steering effort is required to operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.

For additional information, see "Power steering" (P. 5-135).
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) OFF warning light (if so equipped)
This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started.
This light illuminates when the RAB system is turned off in the vehicle information display.
If the light illuminates when the RAB system is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P. 5-84).
Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is operating, thus alerting that the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. The road surface may be slippery.
You may feel or hear the system working; this is normal.
The light will blink for a few seconds after the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.

The

indicator light also comes on

when you place the ignition switch in the

ON position. The light will turn off after ap-

proximately 2 seconds if the system is op-

erational. If the light does not come on

have the system checked. it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the VDC is turned off in the vehicle information display. This indicates the VDC has been turned off.

Turn the VDC on using the vehicle information display, or by restarting the engine. For additional information, see "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P. 5-137).

The VDC light also comes on when the ig-

nition switch is placed in the ON position.

The light will turn off after a period of time if

the system is operational. If the light stays

on or comes on along with the

indica-

tor light while you are driving, have the VDC

system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-15

WARNING
VDC should remain on unless freeing a vehicle from mud or snow.
While the VDC system is operating, you might feel a slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this is normal.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (other)
For additional information on warnings and indicators, see "Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A" (P. 2-17) or "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type B" (P. 2-32).
Drive sport mode indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
This light illuminates and then turns off when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, and when the drive sport mode is selected.
For additional information, see "Drive sport mode switch" (P. 5-20).

ECO mode indicator light (green)
This light comes on when the ECO mode has been selected. For additional information, see "ECO mode switch" (P. 5-22).
Front fog light indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
The front fog light indicator light illuminates when the front fog lights are on. For additional information, see "Fog light switch" (P. 2-59).
High Beam Assist indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
This indicator light illuminates when the headlights come on while the headlight switch is in the AUTO position with the high beams selected. This indicates that the high beam assist is operational.
For additional information, see "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P. 2-52).

High beam indicator light (blue)
This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected.
Side light and headlight indicator light (green)
The side light and headlight indicator light illuminates when the side light or headlight position is selected. For additional information, see "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P. 2-52).
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights (green)
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on.

2-16 Instruments and controls

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY 4.2 INCH (11 cm) TYPE A (if so equipped)

AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.
Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the driver's door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off before leaving the vehicle.
NISSAN Intelligent Key® door buzzer
The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any one of the following improper operations is found. · The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle
when locking the doors and trunk. · The Intelligent Key is taken outside the
vehicle when operating the vehicle.

· Any doors are not closed securely when locking the doors.
When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" (P. 3-5).
Parking brake reminder chime
A chime sounds if the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven. The chime will stop if the parking brake is released or the vehicle speed returns to zero.

LIC2630
The vehicle information display is located to the left of the speedometer. It displays such items as: · Vehicle settings · Trip computer information · Drive system warnings and settings · Cruise control system information
(if so equipped) · NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation
information · Indicators and warnings

Instruments and controls 2-17

LIC3566

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

The vehicle information display can be

changed using the

, and OK buttons located on the steer-

ing wheel.

- Use these buttons

to navigate the vehicle information

display.

2 OK - Change or select an item in the
vehicle information display.

-- Returns to the previous menu.

The OK,

and

buttons also

control audio and control panel functions

in some conditions. Most screens and

menus offer instruction prompts of the

steering switch buttons to indicate how to

control the vehicle information display. The

OK button changes the audio source and

the

buttons also control voice

recognition manual mode. The OK button

can be used to change the audio source

when the audio screen is displayed. The

buttons can be used when con-

trolling voice recognition prompts manu-

ally. For additional information, refer to the

separate NissanConnect® Owner's Manual.

STARTUP DISPLAY
When the vehicle in placed in the ON position the screens that display in the vehicle information include: · Active system status (if so equipped) · Trip computer · Fuel economy · Warnings · Outside air temperature · Odometer/Twin Trip Odometer · Audio

Warnings will only display if there are any present. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display warnings and indicators" (P. 2-26).
To control what items display in the vehicle information display, see "Settings" (P. 2-18).
SETTINGS
The setting mode allows you to change the information displayed in the vehicle information display: · VDC Setting · Driver Assistance (if so equipped) · ECO Mode Setting · TPMS Settings (if so equipped) · Clock · Vehicle Settings · Maintenance · Customize Display · Unit · Language · Factory Reset

2-18 Instruments and controls

VDC Setting
The VDC Setting menu allows the user to enable or disable the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system.

System

Menu item

Explanation
Allows the user to turn the VDC system on or off. For additional information, see "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P. 5-137).

Driver Assistance (if so equipped)
The driver assistance menu allows the user to change the settings for driving, parking, and braking aids.

Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Emergency Brake
Front

Rear

Lane

Lane Departure Warning

Lane Departure Prevention

Blind Spot Blind Spot (BSW)

Parking Aids Display Front Sensor Rear Sensor

Explanation Displays available emergency braking options. Allows user to turn the front emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see "Intelligent Emergency Braking" (P. 5-91). Allows user to turn the rear emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P. 5-84). Displays available lane options. Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system on or off. For additional information, see "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-23). Allows user to turn the Intelligent Lane Intervention system on or off. For additional information, see "Intelligent Lane Intervention" (P. 5-30). Displays available blind spot options. Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system on or off. For additional information, see "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P. 5-38). Displays available parking aids. Allows user to auto display the sonar. For additional information, see "Front and rear sonar system" (P. 5-139).. Allows user to turn the front sonar on or off. Allows user to turn the rear sonar on or off.

Instruments and controls 2-19

Menu item Distance Volume Rear Cross Traffic Alert
Driver Attention Alert
Timer Alert Low Temperature Alert

Explanation Allows user to set the distance sensor range to Long/Medium/Short. Allows the user to set the parking sensor volume to High/Medium/Low. Allows user to turn the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system on or off. For additional information, see "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" (P. 5-49). Allows user to turn the Intelligent Driver Alertness on or off. For additional information, see "Intelligent Driver Alertness" (P. 5-128). Allows user to set or reset an alert at a specific time interval. Allows user to turn the low temperature alert on or off.

ECO Mode Setting
The ECO mode setting menu allows the user to change the settings for the ECO mode.

Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item ECO Customize
Cruise Control Air Conditioning
ECO Info Settings ECO Indicator ECO Drive Report
View History

Explanation Displays available ECO mode settings. Allows user to set the Cruise Control mode to on or off. For additional information, see "Cruise control" (P. 5-58). Allows user to set the Air Conditioning mode to Normal or ECO. For additional information, see "Heater and air conditioner" (P. 4-38). Displays available ECO information settings. Allows user to turn the ECO indicator on or off. Allows user to turn the ECO Drive Report on or off. Displays the history report for the vehicle.

2-20 Instruments and controls

TPMS Settings (if so equipped)
The TPMS settings menu allows the user to change the tire pressure units displayed in the vehicle information display.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item TPMS Setting
Target Front Target Rear Tire Pressure Unit

Clock

Menu item

Explanation Displays available TPMS settings. Allows user to select the target tire pressure for the front tires. Allows user to select the target tire pressure for the rear tires. Allows user to select the tire pressure units that will display in the vehicle information display.
Explanation Allows user to adjust the clock settings and time within the vehicle information display. Adjustments that can be made include automatically setting the time, 12H/24H format and manually setting the time. If these options do not appear, the clock must be set within the center display. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner's Manual.

Instruments and controls 2-21

Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings allow the user to change the lighting and locking settings.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Lighting
Welcome Headlight Auto Room Lamp Light Off Delay Turn indicator 3 Flash Pass
Locking Ext. Door Switch Selective Unlock
Auto Door Unlock Shift to Park IGN OFF OFF
Horn beeps on lock
Wipers Speed Dependent
Rear Door Alert Horn & Alert Alert Only OFF

Explanation Displays the available option for lighting. Allows user to turn the welcome light on or off. Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off. Allows user to change the length of time the exterior lights remain on. Displays the available option for the turn indicator. Allows the user to turn the 3 flash pass feature on or off. For additional information, please see "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P. 2-52). Displays the available locking options. Allows user to turn the exterior door switch on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated. Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the driver's door is unlocked after the door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver's or front passenger's side door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 5 seconds. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once. Displays the auto door unlock options. Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off. Doors will have to be manually unlocked. Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators will flash once when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key. Displays the various wipers settings. For additional information, see "Wiper and washer switch" (P. 2-51). Allows the user to turn the speed dependent feature on or off. Displays the available Rear Door Alert options. For additional information, see "Rear Door Alert" (P. 2-62). When selected, the alert is displayed and horn sounds. When selected, only the alert is displayed. When selected, no alert or horn will be active.

2-22 Instruments and controls

Maintenance
The maintenance menu allows the user to set reminders for various vehicle maintenance items.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional information, see "Changing wheels and tires" (P. 8-33). Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.

Menu item Maintenance
Oil Control System Oil and Filter Tire Other

Explanation Displays various maintenance reminder options. Allows user to reset the current interval. This should only be done after completing oil change maintenance. Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

Instruments and controls 2-23

Customize Display
The customize display menu allows the user to customize the information that appears in the vehicle information display.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Main menu selection
Speed Blank Fuel Economy ECO Pedal Guide Drive Computer TPMS Audio Driving Aids Welcome Effect Gauges Animation Light/Wiper Headlights mode guidance Wiper mode guidance

Explanation Displays available screens that can be shown in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the speed screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the blank on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the fuel economy screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the ECO pedal guide on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the drive computer screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the TPMS screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the audio screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the driving aids screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Displays the available welcome effect settings. Allows user to turn the gauges effect on or off. Allows user to turn the animation effect on or off. Displays the available light and wiper guidance settings. Allows user to turn the light mode guidance on or off. Allows user to turn the wiper mode guidance on or off.

2-24 Instruments and controls

Unit
The unit menu allows the user to change the units shown in the vehicle information display.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Mileage/Fuel Tire Pressure Temperature

Menu item

Explanation Displays the available mileage display units. Displays the available mileage display units. Displays the available temperature display units.

Language
The language menu allows the user to change the languages displayed in the vehicle information display.

Language

Menu item

Explanation Displays available language options for the vehicle information display.

Factory Reset
The factory reset menu allows the user to restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status.

Factory Reset

Menu item

Explanation
Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, the user can confirm or cancel the reset.

Instruments and controls 2-25

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
The following messages may appear in your vehicle information display.
Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system (if I-Key battery level is low) This indicator appears when the battery of the Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key system and the vehicle are not communicating normally. If this appears, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal. For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" (P. 3-5).
Key Battery Low This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power. If this indicator appears, replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, see "Battery replacement" (P. 8-21).
2-26 Instruments and controls

Key ID Incorrect
This warning appears when the ignition switch is placed from the OFF position and the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the system. You cannot start the engine with an unregistered key.
For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" (P. 3-5).
Key System Error: See Owner's Manual
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this warning appears for a period of time and then turns off.
The Key System Error message warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system. If the warning appears while the engine is stopped, it may be impossible to start the engine.
If the warning appears while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However, in these cases, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

No Key Detected
This warning appears when the Intelligent Key is left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position. Make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" (P. 3-5).
Brightness indicator
This indicator appears when the vehicle information display screen brightness is being adjusted.
Check Rear Seat For All Articles
When the system is enabled, this message appears when the vehicle comes to a complete stop, the vehicle is transitioned from the D (Drive) position to P (Park) position, and the driver exits the vehicle. This message alerts the driver, after a period of time, to check for items in the rear seat after the audible alert has been provided.
NOTE:
This system is disabled until a driver enables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "How to use the vehicle information display" (P. 2-18).

For additional information, see "Rear Door Alert" (P. 2-62).
Rear Door Alert is activated
When the system is enabled, this message appears when the Rear Door Alert system is active and can remind the driver to check the back seat.
· Using the steering wheel switch, a driver can select "Dismiss Message" to clear the display for a period of time. If no selection is made, this message automatically turns off after a period of time. If this message does not automatically turn off, it is not a malfunction.
· Using the steering wheel switch, a driver can select "Disable Alert" to disable the horn alert for the remainder of the current trip.
WARNING
Selecting "Dismiss Message" during a stop within a trip temporarily dismisses the message for that stop without turning the system off. Alerts can be provided for other stops during the trip. Selecting "Disable Alert" turns off the Rear Door Alert system for the remainder of a trip and no audible alert will be provided.

NOTE:
This system is disabled until a driver enables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "How to use the vehicle information display" (P. 2-18).
For additional information, see "Rear Door Alert" (P. 2-62).
Door/Trunk Open This warning appears when a door or the trunk has been opened.
Drive sport mode indicator
A small "S" appears to the right of the Transmission Shift Position indicator in the vehicle information display when the drive sport mode is engaged.
Activate the drive sport mode by pushing the switch on the shift lever while the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position.
For additional information, see "Drive sport mode switch" (P. 5-20).

Engine Oil Service due in km This distance to oil change is displayed if the distance to oil change is less than 100 km (62 miles). Headlight Maintenance Due See Owner's Manual This warning appears when the LED headlights are not functioning properly. If this warning appears, have your system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Loose Fuel Cap This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. For additional information, see "Fuel-filler cap" (P. 3-19).
Low Fuel
This warning appears when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).
Instruments and controls 2-27

Low Oil Pressure: See Owner's Manual This warning appears in the message area of the vehicle information display if low oil pressure is detected. This gauge is not designed to indicate low oil level. The low oil pressure warning is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional information, see "Engine oil" (P. 8-7).
Low Outside Temperature This warning appears if the outside temperature is below 3°C (37°F). The temperature can be changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. For additional information, see "Settings" (P. 2-18).
Low Washer Fluid This warning appears when the windshield-washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary. For additional information, see "Windshield-washer fluid" (P. 8-11).
2-28 Instruments and controls

Outside Temperature Display
The outside temperature display appears in the center region of the vehicle information display.
Parking Sensor Error -- See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when there is an error with the system. For additional information, see "Front and rear sonar system" (P. 5-139).
Power will turn off to save the battery
This message appears in the vehicle information display after a period of time if the ignition switch is in the ON position and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For additional information, see "Push-button ignition switch positions" (P. 5-12).
Power turned off to save the battery
This message appears after the ignition switch is automatically turned off. For additional information, see "Push-button ignition switch positions" (P. 5-12).

Push brake and start switch to drive
This indicator appears when the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.
This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed. You can start the engine from any position of the ignition switch.
Push clutch and start switch to drive
This indicator appears when the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.
This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the clutch and brake pedal depressed. You can start the engine from any position of the ignition switch.
Rear seat belt reminder
This warning appears for 65 seconds after the ignition is placed in the ON position and the engine is started.
This warning message shows the status of the three rear seat belts. When one of the rear seat belts are buckled, the corresponding rear seat belt indicator will appear grey. When one of the rear seat belts

are unbuckled, the corresponding rear seat belt indicator will appear red.
After a change in buckle status, a chime will sound and the warning will appear for another 65 seconds.
NOTE:
When both the front seat belt chime and rear seat belt reminder functions are working at the same time, the front seat belt chime will be indicated first.
Release Parking Brake
This warning appears in the message area of the vehicle information display when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven.
Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights
This warning appears when the headlights are left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the OFF or AUTO position. For additional information, see "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P. 2-52).

Rotate Steering Wheel and Push Start Switch This indicator appears when the steering lock cannot be released.
If this indicator appears, push the ignition switch while lightly turning the steering wheel right and left.
Shift to Park
This warning appears when the ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or OFF position and the shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also, a chime sounds when the ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or OFF position.
Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse This warning may appear if the extended storage switch is not pushed in. When this warning appears, push in the extended storage switch to turn off the warning.
Tire Pressure Low - Add Air
This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected. The warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long

as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire placard. For additional information, see "Low tire pressure warning light" (P. 2-12) and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5) or (P. 6-3).
TPMS Error: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when there is an error with your TPMS. If this warning appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Transmission Shift Position indicator
This indicator shows the transmission shift position.
CVT Malfunction Service now
This warning appears when there is a problem with the CVT system. If this warning appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-29

Engine hot Power reduced
This engine has a high fluid temperature protection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes too high (for example, climbing steep grades in high temperatures with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of engine damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be reduced.
WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protection mode operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the engine to return to normal operation; or have it repaired if necessary.

Engine Malfunction: Power reduced Service now
This warning appears when the engine is not operating under normal conditions. If this warning appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Engine Malfunction Service now
This warning appears when there is a problem with the engine. If this warning appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Engine Stalled: Stop Safely
This message appears 30 seconds before the vehicle is shut down due to an above normal operating exhaust temperature. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) and malfunction warning (red) will illuminate. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer immediately for this service.
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator
This indicator appears when the BSW or RCTA system is engaged.

For additional information, see "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P. 5-38) or "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" (P. 5-49).
Cruise control indicator
This indicator shows the cruise control system status.
When cruise control is activated, a green circle will illuminate to indicate it is set. The vehicle information display will also display the speed the cruise control was set at. If you accelerate past the set speed, the speed will blink until you either cancel cruise control or go back to the set speed. If cruise control is on and canceled, the speed will be displayed to show the speed the vehicle will return to if the resume button is activated.
Currently not available
This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system or the Intelligent Lane Intervention system is engaged.
Under the following conditions, the ICC system or the Intelligent Lane Intervention system is automatically canceled: · When the VDC operates · When a wheel slips

2-30 Instruments and controls

· When the VDC system is turned off
The above system cannot be used in some situations (VDC operates, wheel slip and VDC system is off.)
Driver Attention Alert Malfunction
This warning appears when the Intelligent Driver Alertness system is not functioning properly. For additional information, see "Intelligent Driver Alertness" (P. 5-128).
Driver Attention Alert-- Take a Break?
This alert appears when the system has detected that the driver may be displaying fatigue or a lack of attention.
Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Manual
This message appears when the front radar sensor may be obstructed due to: · mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc. · inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
All forward driving aids are temporarily disabled until the system detects that the front radar sensor is no longer obstructed.
For additional information, see "Intelligent Emergency Braking" (P. 5-91), "Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detec-

tion" (P. 5-101) or "Intelligent Forward Collision Warning" (P. 5-114).
Intelligent Emergency Braking emergency warning indicator
This indicator appears along, with an audible warning, when the system detects the possibility of a forward collision.
For additional information, see "Intelligent Emergency Braking" (P. 5-91).
Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection emergency warning indicator
This indicator appears along, with an audible warning, when the system detects the possibility of a forward collision.
For additional information, see "Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-101).
Intelligent Lane Intervention indicator
This indicator appears when the Intelligent Lane Intervention system is engaged.
For additional information, see "Intelligent Lane Intervention" (P. 5-30).

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator
This indicator appears when the LDW system is engaged.
For additional information, see "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-23).
Not Available Poor Road Conditions
This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system or the Intelligent Lane Intervention system is engaged. Under the following conditions, the ICC system or the Intelligent Lane Intervention system is automatically canceled: · When the VDC operates · When a wheel slips The above system cannot be used in some situations (VDC operates and wheel slip.)
Not Available System Malfunction
This warning appears when one or more of the following systems (if so equipped) is not functioning properly. · Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (P. 5-60) · Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (P. 5-38) · Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (P. 5-23) · Intelligent Lane Intervention (P. 5-30) · Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (P. 5-49)
Instruments and controls 2-31

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY 7 INCH (18 cm) TYPE B (if so equipped)

If one or more of these warnings appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system warning indicator
This indicator appears to indicate the status of the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P. 5-84).
System Fault
This warning appears if there is a malfunction in the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P. 5-84).
Unavailable: High Camera Temperature
This message appears when the camera detects an interior temperature of more than 104°F (40°C). For additional information, see "Intelligent Lane Intervention" (P. 5-30) or "Lane Departure Warning" (P. 5-23).

Unavailable Side Radar Obstruction
This message appears when the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable because a radar blockage is detected. For additional information, see "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P. 5-38) and "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" (P. 5-49).
Vehicle ahead detection indicator
This indicator appears when the following systems (if so equipped) are engaged and have detected a vehicle:
· Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection (P. 5-101)
· Intelligent Emergency Braking (P. 5-91)
· Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (P. 5-114)

LIC3224
The vehicle information display is located to the left of the speedometer. It displays such items as: · Vehicle settings · Drive computer information · Drive system warnings and settings · Cruise control system information
(if so equipped) · NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation
information · Indicators and warnings · Tire pressure information (if so equipped) · Audio information

2-32 Instruments and controls

· Bluetooth® Hands-free Phone information
· Driving Aids · Odometer/twin trip odometer · Distance to empty · Clock and outside temperature

LIC3566

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

The vehicle information display can be

changed using the

, and OK buttons located on the steer-

ing wheel.

- Use these buttons

to navigate the vehicle information

display.

2 OK - Change or select an item in the
vehicle information display.

-- Returns to the previous menu.

The OK,

and

buttons also

control audio and control panel functions

in some conditions. Most screens and

menus offer instruction prompts of the

steering switch buttons to indicate how to

control the vehicle information display.

Dots on the right side of the vehicle infor-

mation display may appear if there is more

than one page of menu items or warning

messages, depending on the type of me-

ter. The OK button changes the audio

source and the

buttons also con-

trol voice recognition manual mode. The

OK button can be used to change the au-

dio source when the audio screen is dis-

played. The

buttons can be used

when controlling voice recognition

prompts manually. For additional informa-

tion, refer to the separate NissanConnect®

Owner's Manual.

Instruments and controls 2-33

STARTUP DISPLAY
When the vehicle in placed in the ON position the vehicle information display may display the following screens (if so equipped): · Home · Drive Computer -- Speed, Fuel Economy,
Trip Distance & Time · Convenience · Digital speed and average speed · Instant fuel economy/ average fuel
economy · Tire Pressure · Audio/telephone · Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) · Driving Aids · Settings · Warnings*
*Warnings will only display if there are any present. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display warnings and indicators" (P. 2-41).
To control what items display in the vehicle information display, see "How to use the vehicle information display" (P. 2-33).

RESETTING THE DRIVE COMPUTER

The drive computer is divided across three screens:

· Average Speed · Average Fuel Economy · Trip Distance & Time

1. Press the

buttons

until you reach the desired drive com-

puter mode.

2. Press and hold the OK button for approximately 1 second to reset the information on the currently displayed screen.

NOTE:

If you wish to reset all drive computer values at once, press and hold the OK button for approximately 3 seconds until a reset menu appears; and follow the instructions.

SETTINGS
The setting mode allows you to change the information displayed in the vehicle information display. It also allows you to change vehicle functions: · VDC Setting · Driver Assistance (if so equipped) · ECO Mode Setting · TPMS Settings (if so equipped) · Clock · Vehicle Settings · Maintenance · Customize Display · Unit/Language · Factory Reset

2-34 Instruments and controls

VDC Setting
The VDC Setting menu allows the user to enable or disable the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system.

System

Menu item

Explanation
Allows the user to turn the VDC system on or off. For additional information, see "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P. 5-137).

Driver Assistance (if so equipped)
The driver assistance menu allows the user to change the settings for driving, parking, and braking aids.

Some of the menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Lane

Menu item Lane Departure Warning

Lane Departure Prevention

Blind Spot Blind Spot Warning

Emergency Brake Front

Rear

Parking Aids Display Front sensor Rear sensor

Explanation Displays available lane options. Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system on or off. For additional information, see "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-23). Allows user to turn the Intelligent Lane Intervention system on or off. For additional information, see "Intelligent Lane Intervention" (P. 5-30). Displays available blind spot options. Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system on or off. For additional information, see "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P. 5-38). Displays available emergency braking options. Allows user to turn the front emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see "Intelligent Emergency Braking" (P. 5-91). Allows user to turn the rear emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P. 5-84). Displays available parking aids. Allows user to display the sonar. For additional information, see "Front and rear sonar system" (P. 5-139). Allows user to turn the front sonar on or off. Allows user to turn the rear sonar on or off.

Instruments and controls 2-35

Menu item Range Volume Rear Cross Traffic Alert
Driver Attention Alert
Timer Alert Low Temperature Alert

Explanation Allows user to set the distance sensor range to Long/Medium/Short. Allows the user to set the parking sensor volume to High/Medium/Low. Allows user to turn the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system on or off. For additional information, see "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" (P. 5-49). Allows user to turn the Intelligent Driver Alertness on or off. For additional information, see "Intelligent Driver Alertness" (P. 5-128). Allows user to set the timer alert. Allows user to turn the low temperature alert on or off.

ECO Mode Setting
The ECO mode setting menu allows the user to change the settings for the ECO mode.

Some of the menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item ECO Mode Customize
Cruise Control Air Conditioning
ECO Drive Assist ECO Indicator ECO Drive Report
View History

Explanation Displays available ECO mode settings. Allows user to turn the Cruise Control mode on or off. For additional information, see "Cruise Control" (P. 5-58). Allows user to turn the Air Conditioning mode on or off. For additional information, see "Heater and air conditioner" (P. 4-38). Displays available ECO information settings. Allows user to turn the ECO indicator on or off. Allows user to turn the ECO Drive Report on or off. Displays the history report for the vehicle.

2-36 Instruments and controls

TPMS Settings (if so equipped)
The TPMS settings menu allows the user to view or change the tire pressure units displayed in the vehicle information display.
Some of the menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item TPMS Setting
Target Front Target Rear Tire Pressure Unit

Explanation Displays available tire pressure settings. Allows user to select the target tire pressure for the front tires. Allows user to select the target tire pressure for the rear tires. Allows user to select the tire pressure units that will display in the vehicle information display.

Clock

Menu item

Explanation
Allows user to adjust the clock settings and time within the vehicle information display. Adjustments that can be made include manually setting the time, 12H/24H format, and time zone (if so equipped). The clock can also be set within the center display. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner's Manual.

Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings allow the user to change the settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and other vehicle settings.

Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Lighting
Welcome Headlight Auto Room Lamp Light Off Delay Turn indicator 3 Flashes Continuous

Explanation Displays the available lighting options. Allows user to turn the welcome light on or off. Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off. Allows user to change the length of time the exterior lights remain on. Displays the available turn indicator options. Allows user to turn 3 flash pass feature on or off. Allows user to adjust the continuous feature.
Instruments and controls 2-37

Menu item Locking
Ext. Door Switch
Selective Unlock
Auto Door Unlock Shift to P IGN OFF OFF
Horn beeps on lock
Wipers Speed Dependent
Remote Engine Start
Rear Door Alert Horn & Alert Alert Only OFF

Explanation Displays the available locking options. Allows user to turn the exterior door switch on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated. Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the driver's door is unlocked after the door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver's or front passenger's side door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 5 seconds. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once. Displays the auto door unlock options. Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into Park. Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off. Doors will have to be manually unlocked. Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators will flash once when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key. Displays the available wiper options. Allows user to turn wiper with speed on or off. Allows user to turn the Remote Engine Start on or off. When turned on, the engine can be restarted remotely. For additional information, see "Remote engine start" (P. 3-15). Displays the available Rear Door Alert options. When selected, the alert is displayed and horn sounds. When selected, only the alert is displayed. When selected, no alert or horn will be active.

2-38 Instruments and controls

Maintenance
The maintenance menu allows the user to set reminders for various vehicle maintenance items.

Menu item Maintenance
Oil Control System Oil and Filter Tire Other

Instruments and controls 2-39

Menu item Main Menu Selection
Home Speed Blank Fuel Economy ECO Pedal Guide Drive Computer TPMS Audio Cruise Screen Transition Welcome Effect Gauges Animation Light/Wiper Guidance Lights mode guidance Wiper mode guidance

Explanation Displays available screens that can be shown in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the home screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the speed screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the blank on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the fuel economy screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the ECO Pedal guide screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the drive computer screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the TPMS screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the audio controls screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allow user to turn the cruise screen transition on or off. Displays the available welcome effect settings. Allows user to turn the gauges effect on or off. Allows user to turn the animation effect on or off. Displays the available light and wiper guidance settings. Allows user to turn the light mode guidance on or off. Allows user to turn the wiper mode guidance on or off.

2-40 Instruments and controls

Unit/Language
The unit/language menu allows the user to change the units shown in the vehicle information display.

Mileage/Fuel Tire Pressure Temperature Language

Menu item

Explanation Displays the available mileage/fuel display units and allows user to select preferred unit for display. Allows user to select the tire pressure display units. Allows user to select the temperature display units. Displays the available language options and allows user to select preferred language for display.

Factory Reset
The factory reset menu allows the user to restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status.

Factory Reset

Menu item

Explanation
Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, the user can confirm or cancel the reset.

If this appears, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal. For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" (P. 3-5).
Key Battery Low
This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power.
If this indicator appears, replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, see "Battery replacement" (P. 8-21).

Instruments and controls 2-41

The Key System Error message warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system. If the warning appears while the engine is stopped, it may be impossible to start the engine.
If the warning appears while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However, in these cases, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
No Key Detected
This warning appears when the Intelligent Key is left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position. Make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" (P. 3-5).
Brightness indicator
This indicator appears when the vehicle information display screen brightness is being adjusted.
Chassis Control System Error: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears if the chassis control is not functioning properly. Have the sys-

tem checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Check Rear Seat For All Articles
When the system is enabled, this message appears when the vehicle comes to a complete stop, the vehicle is transitioned from the D (Drive) position to P (Park) position, and the driver exits the vehicle. This message alerts the driver, after a period of time, to check for items in the rear seat after the audible alert has been provided.
NOTE:
This system is disabled until a driver enables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "How to use the vehicle information display" (P. 2-33).
For additional information, see "Rear Door Alert" (P. 2-62).
Rear Door Alert is activated
When the system is enabled, this message appears when the Rear Door Alert system is active and can remind the driver to check the back seat.

· Using the steering wheel switch, a driver can select "Dismiss Message" to clear the display for a period of time. If no selection is made, this message automatically turns off after a period of time. If this message does not automatically turn off, it is not a malfunction.
· Using the steering wheel switch, a driver can select "Disable Alert" to disable the horn alert for the remainder of the current trip.
WARNING
Selecting "Dismiss Message" during a stop within a trip temporarily dismisses the message for that stop without turning the system off. Alerts can be provided for other stops during the trip. Selecting "Disable Alert" turns off the Rear Door Alert system for the remainder of a trip and no audible alert will be provided.
NOTE:
This system is disabled until a driver enables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "How to use the vehicle information display" (P. 2-33).

2-42 Instruments and controls

For additional information, see "Rear Door Alert" (P. 2-62).
Door/Trunk Open This warning appears when a door or the trunk has been opened.
Engine Oil Service due in km
This distance to oil change is displayed if the distance to oil change is less than 100 km (62 miles).
Headlight System Error See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when there is an error with the system. For additional information, see "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P. 2-52).
Loose Fuel Cap
This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. For additional information, see "Fuel-filler cap" (P. 3-19).

Low Fuel
This warning appears when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).
Low Outside Temperature
This warning appears if the outside temperature is below 3°C (37°F). The temperature can be changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. For additional information, see "Settings" (P. 2-18).
Low Washer Fluid
This warning appears when the windshield-washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary. For additional information, see "Windshield-washer fluid" (P. 8-11).
Parking Sensor Error -- See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when there is an error with the system. For additional information, see "Front and rear sonar system" (P. 5-139).

Power will turn off to save the battery
This message appears in the vehicle information display after a period of time if the ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or the ON position and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For additional information, see "Push-button ignition switch positions" (P. 5-12).
Power turned off to save the battery
This message appears after the ignition switch is automatically turned off. For additional information, see "Push-button ignition switch positions" (P. 5-12).
Push brake and start switch to drive
This indicator appears when the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.
This indicator also appears when the vehicle has been started using the Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) function.
This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed. You can start the engine from any position of the ignition switch.

Instruments and controls 2-43

Push Ignition to OFF
After the Push Ignition to OFF warning appears, the warning will appear if the ignition switch is placed in the AUTO ACC position when the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position.
To turn off the Push warning, place the ignition switch in the ON position and then in the LOCK position.
Rear seat belt reminder
This warning appears for 65 seconds after the ignition is placed in the ON position and the engine is started.
This warning message shows the status of the three rear seat belts. When one of the rear seat belts are buckled, the corresponding rear seat belt indicator will appear grey. When one of the rear seat belts are unbuckled, the corresponding rear seat belt indicator will appear red.
After a change in buckle status, a chime will sound and the warning will appear for another 65 seconds.

NOTE:
When both the front seat belt chime and rear seat belt reminder functions are working at the same time, the front seat belt chime will be indicated first.
Release Parking Brake
This warning appears in the message area of the vehicle information display when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven.
Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights
This warning appears when the headlights are left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the OFF or AUTO position. For additional information, see "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P. 2-52).
Rotate the steering and push the start switch
This indicator appears when the steering lock cannot be released.
If this indicator appears, push the ignition switch while lightly turning the steering wheel right and left.

Shift to Park
This warning appears when the ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or OFF position and the shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also, a chime sounds when the ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or OFF position.
If this warning appears, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and start the engine.
Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse
This warning may appear if the extended storage switch is not pushed in. When this warning appears, push in the extended storage switch to turn off the warning. For additional information, see "Extended storage switch" (P. 2-64).
Timer Alert -- Time for a break?
This indicator appears when the set time is reached. The time can be set up to six hours. For additional information, see "Settings" (P. 2-18).

2-44 Instruments and controls

Tire Pressure Low - Add Air
This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected. The warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire placard. For additional information, see "Low tire pressure warning light" (P. 2-12) and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5) or (P. 6-3).
TPMS Error: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when there is an error with your TPMS. If this warning appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Transmission Shift Position indicator
This indicator shows the transmission shift position.

CVT hot Power reduced
This transmission has a high fluid temperature protection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes too high (for example, climbing steep grades in high temperatures with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be reduced.
WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protection mode operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal operation; or have it repaired if necessary.

CVT Malfunction Service now
This warning appears when there is a problem with the CVT system. If this warning appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Engine hot Power reduced
This engine has a high fluid temperature protection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes too high (for example, climbing steep grades in high temperatures with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of engine damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be reduced.

Instruments and controls 2-45

WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protection mode operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the engine to return to normal operation; or have it repaired if necessary.
Engine Malfunction: Power reduced Service now This warning appears when the engine is not operating under normal conditions. If this warning appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Engine Malfunction Service now This warning appears when there is a problem with the engine. If this warning appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2-46 Instruments and controls

Engine Stalled: Stop Safely
This message appears 30 seconds before the vehicle is shut down due to an above normal operating exhaust temperature. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) and malfunction warning (red) will illuminate. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer immediately for this service.
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator
This indicator appears when the BSW or RCTA system is engaged.
For additional information, see "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P. 5-38) or "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" (P. 5-49).
Cruise control indicator
This indicator shows the cruise control system status.
When cruise control is activated, a green circle will illuminate to indicate it is set. The vehicle information display will also display the speed the cruise control was set at. If you accelerate past the set speed, the speed will blink until you either cancel cruise control or go back to the set speed. If

cruise control is on and canceled, the speed will be displayed to show the speed the vehicle will return to if the resume button is activated.
Currently not available
This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system or Intelligent Lane Intervention system is engaged.
Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled: · When the VDC operates · When a wheel slips · When the VDC system is turned off
The above system cannot be used in some situations (VDC operates, wheel slip and VDC system is off.)
Driver Attention Alert-- Take a Break?
This alert appears when the system has detected that the driver may be displaying fatigue or a lack of attention.
Driver Attention Alert Malfunction
This warning appears when the Intelligent Driver Alertness system is not functioning properly. For additional information, see "Intelligent Driver Alertness" (P. 5-128).

Drive sport mode indicator
A small "S" appears to the right of the Transmission Shift Position indicator in the vehicle information display when the drive sport mode is engaged.
Activate the drive sport mode by pushing the switch on the shift lever while the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position.
For additional information, see "Drive sport mode switch" (P. 5-20).
Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner's Manual
This message appears when the front radar sensor may be obstructed due to: · mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc. · inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
All forward driving aids are temporarily disabled until the system detects that the front radar sensor is no longer obstructed.
For additional information, see "Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)" (P. 5-60), "Intelligent Emergency Braking" (P. 5-91), "Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-101) or "Intelligent Forward Collision Warning" (P. 5-114).

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicators
These indicators show the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system status. The status is shown by color. For additional information, see "Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)" (P. 5-60).
Intelligent Emergency Braking emergency warning indicator
This indicator appears along, with an audible warning, when the system detects the possibility of a forward collision.
For additional information, see "Intelligent Emergency Braking" (P. 5-91).
Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection emergency warning indicator
This indicator appears along, with an audible warning, when the system detects the possibility of a forward collision.
For additional information, see "Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-101).

Intelligent Lane Intervention indicator
This indicator appears when the Intelligent Lane Intervention system is engaged.
For additional information, see "Intelligent Lane Intervention" (P. 5-30).
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator
This indicator appears when the LDW system is engaged.
For additional information, see "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-23).
Malfunction
This warning appears when one or more of the following systems are not functioning properly: · Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pe-
destrian Detection (P. 5-101) · Intelligent Emergency Braking (P. 5-91) · Intelligent Forward Collision Warning
(P. 5-114)
If one or more of these warnings appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-47

Malfunction: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when one or more of the following systems are not functioning properly: · Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (P. 5-49) · Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (P. 5-38)
If one or more of these warnings appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Not Available Poor Road Conditions
This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system or Intelligent Lane Intervention system is engaged.
Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled: · When the VDC operates · When a wheel slips
The above system cannot be used in some situations (VDC operates and wheel slip.)
Not Available System Malfunction
This warning appears when one or more of the following systems (if so equipped) is not functioning properly. For additional information, see the following: · Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (P. 5-60) · Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (P. 5-38)
2-48 Instruments and controls

· Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (P. 5-23)
If one or more of these warnings appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system warning indicator
This indicator appears to indicate the status of the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P. 5-84).
System Fault
This warning appears if there is a malfunction in the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P. 5-84).
Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature
This message appears when the camera detects an interior temperature of more than approximately 104°F (40°C). For additional information, see "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-23).

SECURITY SYSTEMS

LIC0301
Your vehicle may have two types of security systems: · Vehicle security system · NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps detect vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition, and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.
Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features.
How to arm the vehicle security system
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if so equipped). The system can be armed even if the windows and moonroof are open.
2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.

3. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with the Intelligent Key, door handle request switch (if so equipped) or power door lock switch.
4. Wait 30 seconds for the system to complete the pre-armed phase. If during the pre-armed phase one of the following occurs, the system will not arm:
· Any door is unlocked with the Intelligent Key or door request switch (if so equipped).
· The ignition switch is placed in the AUTO ACC or ON position.
· Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will activate when all the doors, hood and trunk are locked with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position. When placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the system will be released.

Instruments and controls 2-49

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the following alarm:

· The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently.

· The alarm automatically turns off after a

period of time. However, the alarm reacti-

vates if the vehicle is tampered with

again. The alarm can be shut off by un-

locking the driver's door or trunk lid with

the key, or by pressing the

button on

the Intelligent Key.

The alarm is activated by:
· opening the door or trunk lid without using the key or Intelligent Key (even if the door is unlocked by releasing the door inside lock switch).

How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by pressing the button on the Intelligent Key or pushing the request switch (if so equipped) on the driver's or passenger's door with the Intelligent Key in range of the door handle.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference. (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

2-50 Instruments and controls

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING

LIC4182

In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defogger before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION
· Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.
· Do not operate the washer if the windshield-washer fluid reservoir is empty.
· Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with windshieldwasher fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based windshield-washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
· Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer's recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the windshieldwasher fluid concentrate and water.

NOTE:
If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF position and remove the snow or ice that is on and around the wiper arms. In approximately 1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the wiper.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed:
1 Intermittent -- intermittent operation
can be adjusted by turning the knob
toward OA (slower) or OB (faster). 2 Low -- continuous low speed operation 3 High -- continuous high speed
operation
Push the lever up O4 to have one sweep
operation (MIST) of the wiper.
Pull the lever toward you O5 to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

Instruments and controls 2-51

NOTE:
The Wiper with Speed feature may be disabled. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A" (P. 2-17) or "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type B" (P. 2-32).

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR (if so equipped) DEFOGGER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

2-52 Instruments and controls

LIC4039
To defog the rear window glass and outside mirror (if so equipped), start the engine and push the rear window defogger switch on.
The rear window defogger automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes.
CAUTION
Use the defogger when the engine is running to avoid discharging the battery. When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defogger.

LIC2634
Type A (if so equipped)
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

1 Rotate the switch to the

position,

and the front parking, tail, license plate,

and instrument panel lights will come

on. The

will illuminate in the meter.

2 Rotate the switch to the

position,

and the headlights will come on and all

the other lights remain on.

LIC4241
Type B (if so equipped)
CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

LIC4007
Type C (if so equipped)

LIC2636
Autolight system (if so equipped)
The autolight system allows the headlights to turn on and off automatically. The autolight system can: · Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,
license plate and instrument panel lights automatically when it is dark. · Turn off all the lights when it is light. · Keep all the lights on for a period of time after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and all doors are closed.

Instruments and controls 2-53

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO
position O1 .

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and a door is opened and left open, the headlights remain on for a period of time.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the

switch to the OFF, , or

position.

LIC3051
Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor located in the top
side O1 of the instrument panel. The au-
tolight sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch placed in the ON position, your vehicle's battery could become discharged.

LIC2637

Headlight beam select

1 To select the high beam function, push

the lever forward. The high beam lights

come on and the

light illuminates

in the meter.

2 Pull the lever back to select the low
beam.

3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes
the headlight high beams on and off.

2-54 Instruments and controls

High Beam Assist (if so equipped)
The High Beam Assist system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 40 km/h (25 mph) and above. If an oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle appears in front of your vehicle when the headlight high beam is on, the headlight will be switched to the low beam automatically.
WARNING
· The High Beam Assist system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for safe driving operation. The driver should remain alert at all times, ensure safe driving practices and switch the high beams and low beam manually when necessary.
· The high beam or low beam may not switch automatically under the following conditions. Switch the high beam and low beam manually.
During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, wind, etc.).
When a light source similar to a headlight or tail light is in the vicinity of the vehicle.

When the headlights of the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle are turned off, when the color of the light is affected due to foreign materials on the lights, or when the light beam is out of position.
When there is a sudden, continuous change in brightness.
When driving on a road that passes over rolling hills, or a road that has level differences.
When driving on a road with many curves.
When a sign or mirror-like surface is reflecting intense light towards the front of the vehicle.
When the container, etc. being towed by a leading vehicle is reflecting intense light.
When a headlight on your vehicle is damaged or dirty.
When the vehicle is leaning at an angle due to a punctured tire, being towed, etc.

· The timing of switching the low beam and high beam may change under the following situations.
The brightness of the headlights of the oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle.
The movement and direction of the oncoming vehicle and the leading vehicle.
When only one light on the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle is illuminated.
When the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle is a two-wheeled vehicle.
Road conditions (incline, curve, the road surface, etc.).
The number of passengers and the amount of luggage.

Instruments and controls 2-55

When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 25 km/h (16 mph), the headlight uses the low beam.

To turn off the High Beam Assist system,

turn the headlight switch to the

posi-

tion or select the low beam position by

placing the lever in the N (Neutral) position.

LIC3696

High Beam Assist operation

To activate the High Beam Assist system,

turn the headlight switch to the AUTO po-
sition O1 and push the lever forward O2

(high beam position). The

High Beam

Assist indicator light in the meter will illumi-

nate while the headlights are turned on.

If the High Beam Assist indicator light does not illuminate in the above condition, it may indicate that the system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2-56 Instruments and controls

LSD3484
Ambient image sensor maintenance
The ambient image sensor O1 for the High
Beam Assist system is located in front of the inside mirror. To maintain the proper operation of the high beam assist system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
· Always keep the windshield clean.
· Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the ambient image sensor.
· Do not strike or damage the areas around the ambient image sensor. Do not touch the sensor lens that is located on the ambient image sensor.

If the ambient image sensor is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Battery saver system (if so equipped)

The light reminder chime will sound if the

headlight switch is in either the

position and when the driver's door is

opened with the ignition switch in the OFF

or LOCK position.

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or

LOCK position while the headlight switch is

in the

or , the battery saver func-

tion will turn off the lights after a period of

time to prevent the battery from being

discharged.

Be sure to turn the headlight switch to the OFF or AUTO position when you leave the vehicle.

CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

LIC4620
MANUAL HEADLIGHT AIMING CONTROL (if so equipped)
Depending on the number of occupants in the vehicle and the load it is carrying, the headlight axis may be higher than desired. If the vehicle is traveling on a hilly road, the headlights may directly hit the rearview mirror of the vehicle ahead or the windshield of the oncoming vehicle. The light axis can be lowered with the operation of the switch.
The larger the number designated on the switch, the lower the axis.

When traveling without a heavy load or on a flat road, select position 0.
Select the switch position by referring to the following sample.

Vehicle Load
Driver only or Driver/front passenger
Driver/front seat passenger/rear seat pas-
sengers Driver/front seat passenger/rear seat passengers/cargo or driver/cargo/no trailer Fully loaded/no trailer

Switch Position
0 1
2 3

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) SYSTEM (if so equipped)

The DRL operate with the headlight switch

in the OFF position when the engine is

started and the parking brake is released.

Turn the headlight switch to the

posi-

tion for full illumination when driving at

night. (The DRL will turn off.)

Instruments and controls 2-57

WARNING

When the DRL system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself or others.

LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) SYSTEM (if so equipped)

The LED DRL operate with the headlight

switch in the OFF position when the engine

is started and the parking brake is re-

leased. When you turn the headlight switch

to the

position for full illumination, the

LED lights switch from LED DRL to the park

function.

WARNING
When the LED DRL system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

LIC3176
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
Press the "+" button to increase the brightness of instrument panel lights.
Press the "-" button to decrease the brightness of instrument panel lights.

LIC2638
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
1 Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signal cancels automatically.
Lane change signal
2 Move the lever up or down until the turn
signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever until the lane change is completed.

2-58 Instruments and controls

Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, and release the lever. The turn signal will automatically flash three times.
Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane change based on road and traffic conditions.
NOTE:
If the turn signal light bulb malfunctions, the turn signal indicator will flash at a higher frequency when the turn signal is activated.
NOTE:
The 3 flash pass feature may be disabled. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A" (P. 2-17) or "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type B" (P. 2-32).

LIC2639

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight

switch to the

position, then turn the

fog light switch to the

position.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight

switch in the AUTO position, the headlights

must be on, then turn the fog light switch to

the

position.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate.

Instruments and controls 2-59

HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so equipped)

HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH (if so equipped)

LIC3973
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat. Use of the seat heater by such people could result in serious injury.

CAUTION
· The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running.
· Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.
· Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion or seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.
· Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.
· Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth.
· When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.
· If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LIC4030
The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 20°C (68°F).
Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts. The indicator light will come on.
If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 20°C (68°F), the system will heat the steering wheel and cycle off and on to maintain a temperature above 20°C (68°F). The indicator light will remain on as long as the system is on.

2-60 Instruments and controls

DYNAMIC DRIVER ASSISTANCE SWITCH (if so equipped)
Push the switch again to turn the heated steering wheel system off manually. The indicator light will go off.
NOTE:
If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is above 20°C (68°F) when the switch is turned on, the system will not heat the steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

The Intelligent Lane Intervention system warns the driver with a warning light and a chime, and helps assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane by applying the brakes to the left or right wheels individually (for a short period of time). For additional information, see "Intelligent Lane Intervention" (P. 5-30).

LIC4224
The dynamic driver assistance switch is used to temporarily turn on and off the Intelligent Lane Intervention system that is activated using the settings menu of the vehicle information display.
The Intelligent Lane Intervention system must be turned on with the dynamic driver assistance switch every time the ignition is placed in the ON position.

Instruments and controls 2-61

REAR DOOR ALERT

The Rear Door Alert system functions under certain conditions to indicate there may be an object or passenger in the rear seat(s). Check the seat(s) before exiting the vehicle.
The Rear Door Alert system is initially disabled. The driver can enable the system using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display warnings and indicators" (P. 2-41) or (P. 2-26).
When the system is enabled:
· The system is activated when a rear door is opened and closed. When the vehicle is started and the system is activated, a visual message appears in the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Rear Door Alert is activated" (P. 2-42) or (P. 2-27).
· If a rear door is opened and closed but the vehicle is not driven, the system will not be activated. A rear door must be opened and closed and the car driven for the system to activate.
· The time interval to activate the system between when the rear door is opened and closed and the vehicle is started is about 10 minutes. A longer interval does not indicate a malfunction.
2-62 Instruments and controls

When the Rear Door Alert system is activated:
· When after driving the driver puts the vehicle in the P (Park) position, a notification message appears in the vehicle information display with the options to "Dismiss Message" or "Disable Alert" if desired. Select "Disable Alert" to temporarily disable for that stop. No selection or `Dismiss Message" will keep the alert enabled for that stop.
· If the alert is enabled when a driver exits the vehicle, a message will appear in the vehicle information display that states "Check Rear Seat for All Articles."
If "Horn & Alert" setting is selected: An audible horn sound will occur after
a short time unless a rear door is opened and closed within a short time to deactivate the alert. If the doors are locked before the alert is deactivated by opening a rear door, the horn will sound. If the trunk is opened before a rear door is opened, the horn will be delayed until after the trunk is closed.

NOTE:
If "Alert Only" setting is selected, the message alert will still be shown in the vehicle information display but the horn will not sound.
WARNING
· If the driver selects "Disable Alert", no audible alert will be provided regardless of rear door open/close status.
· There may be times when there is an object or passenger in the rear seat(s) but the audible alert does not sound. For example, this may occur if rear seat passengers enter or exit the vehicle during a trip.
· The system does not directly detect objects or passengers in the rear seat(s). Instead, it can detect when a rear door is opened and closed, indicating that there may be something in the rear seat(s).
NOTE:
There may be times when the horn sounds but there are no objects or passengers in the rear seat(s).
For additional information, see "Rear Door Alert is activated" (P. 2-27) or (P. 2-27).

EMERGENCY CALL (SOS) BUTTON (if so equipped)

POWER OUTLET (if so equipped)

The power outlet is for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. It is rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.
The power outlet is powered only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The Emergency call (SOS) button is used in combination with a NissanConnect® Services subscription to call for assistance in case of an emergency.
The Emergency call button is under a
cover. Press the cover once O1 . The cover
will drop down, exposing the Emergency call button.

LIC4213
Pressing the button O2 will (with a paid
subscription) reach a response specialist that will provide assistance based on the situation described by the vehicle's occupant. For additional information, or to enroll your vehicle, refer to www.nissan.com.mx/ nissan-connect.html or call 8009647726.

CAUTION
· The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use.
· Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information.
· Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
· Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory.
· Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
· Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on.
· Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned off.

Instruments and controls 2-63

EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH
· Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.
· When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet.

LIC4391
The extended storage switch is used when the vehicle is in transit from the factory. It is located in the fuse panel to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel. If any electrical equipment does not operate, ensure the extended storage switch is pushed fully in place, as shown.

Pulled position

LIC4392

2-64 Instruments and controls

WINDOWS

Pushed position

LIC4393

POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
· Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows.
· To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the driver's door is opened during this period of time, the power to the windows is canceled.

1. Window lock button

LIC3208

2. Power door lock switch

3. Front passenger side switch

4. Right rear passenger side

5. Left rear passenger side

6. Driver side automatic switch
Driver's side power window switch

The driver's side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all of the windows.

Instruments and controls 2-65

To open a window, push the switch and continue to hold it down until the desired window position is reached. To close a window, pull the switch and continue to hold it up until the desired window position is reached.
Locking passengers' windows
When the window lock switch is depressed, only the driver's side window can be opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock function.

LIC2309
Front passenger's power window switch
The passenger's window switch operates only the corresponding passenger's window. To open the window, push the switch and continue to hold it down until the de-
sired window position is reached O1 . To
close the window, pull the switch and continue to hold it up until the desired window
position is reached O2 .

LIC2663
Rear power window switch
The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows. To open the window, push the switch and hold
it down O1 . To close the window, pull the switch up O2 .

2-66 Instruments and controls

LIC4394
Automatic operation
To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, push the window switch down to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window automatically opens all the way. To stop the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening.
To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation, pull the switch up to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window automatically closes all the way. To stop the window, push the switch down while the window is closing.

Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation.
Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.
If the vehicle's battery is disconnected, replaced, or jump started, the power window auto-reverse function may not operate properly. Have the power window autoreverse system re-initialized. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
If the control unit detects something caught in a window equipped with automatic operation as it is closing, the window will be immediately lowered.

When power window switch does not operate
If the power window automatic function does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the power window system:
1. Close the door.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the window. *1
4. Release the power window switch.
5. Pull the power window switch and hold it for approximately 5 seconds or more. *2
6. Push the power window switch down and hold it to fully open the window.
7. Release the power window switch.
8. Push the power window switch down and hold it for approximately 5 seconds or more. *2
9. Pull the power window switch and hold it to fully close the window. *1

Instruments and controls 2-67

MOONROOF (if so equipped)

10. Operate the window by the automatic function (window open and close) to confirm that the initialization is complete.
*1: If the window stops before reaching the fully closed position, release the switch, then pull and hold it again to fully close the window.
*2: After pulling or pushing the power window switch and holding it for approximately 5 seconds or more, the window will move again.
If the window cannot automatically be closed since the auto-reverse function activated due to a malfunction, perform the following procedure to cancel the autoreverse function.
1. Pull the power window switch up until the auto-reverse function is activated, then the window will reverse automatically.
2. Repeat the procedure twice.
3. Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the window to confirm that the cancellation is completed.
2-68 Instruments and controls

LIC4249
POWER MOONROOF
The moonroof will only operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The power moonroof is operational for a period of time, even if the ignition switch is placed in the AUTO ACC or OFF position. If the driver's door is opened during this period of time, the power to the moonroof is canceled.

Sliding the moonroof
To fully open or close the moonroof, push
the switch to the open O1 or close O2 posi-
tion and release it; it need not be held. The roof will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the roof, push the switch once more while it is opening or closing.
Tilting the moonroof
To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then
push the switch O3 and release it; it need
not be held. To tilt down the moonroof, push the switch to the tilt down position
O2 .
Resetting the moonroof switch
If the moonroof does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the moonroof operation system.
1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by repeatedly pushing the moonroof
switch to the close position O2 .
2. Push and hold the switch to the close
position O2 for approximately 15
seconds.
3. Release the switch after the moonroof moves up, down, then back to the full tilt up position.

4. Push and hold the switch to the close
position O2 .
5. Release the switch after the moonroof completes one full cycle from the tilt up position to the closed position, then to the open position, and again to the fully closed position.
6. Check if the moonroof switch operates normally.
If the moonroof does not operate properly after performing the procedure above, have your vehicle serviced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Auto-reverse function (when closing or tilting down the moonroof)
The auto-reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed or tilted down by automatic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the moonroof.
When closing
If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof will immediately open backward.
When tilting down
If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will immediately tilt up.
WARNING
· In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints.
· Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing.

CAUTION · Remove water drops, snow, ice or
sand from the moonroof before opening. · Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area.
Sunshade
Open and close the sunshade by sliding it forward or backward.
If the moonroof does not close
Have your moonroof checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Instruments and controls 2-69

INTERIOR LIGHTS

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

LIC4033
1 The interior light can be turned on re-
gardless of door position. The light will go off after a period of time unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON position when any door is opened.
2 The interior lights can be set to operate
when the doors are opened. To turn off the interior lights when a door is open, push the switch; the interior lights will not illuminate, regardless of door position.
2-70 Instruments and controls

LIC4035
MAP LIGHTS
To turn the map lights on, push the switches. To turn them off, push the switches again.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

LIC4041
PERSONAL LIGHTS
To turn the rear personal lights on, push the switch. To turn them off, push the switch again.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

Instruments and controls 2-71

MEMO
2-72 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
NISSAN Intelligent Key® system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 How to use the remote keyless entry function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Troubleshooting guide (Continuously Variable Transmission only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Troubleshooting guide (Manual Transmission only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Remote Engine Start operating range . . . . . . . 3-15 Remote starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Extending engine run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Canceling a Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Conditions the Remote Engine Start will not work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Trunk lid release switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Interior trunk access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Tilt and telescopic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Manual anti-glare rearview mirror (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

KEYS

LPD2874
Type A (if so equipped) 1. Intelligent Keys (two sets)
2. Mechanical key
3. Key number plate (one plate)
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicle's Intelligent Key components and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components.

LPD2875
Type B (if so equipped)
Never leave the keys in the vehicle.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered prior to use with the Intelligent Key and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components, when registering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to a NISSAN dealer.

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated without knowing the key number.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent Key:
· Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function.
· Do not drop the Intelligent Key. · Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object.
· Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.

· Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
· Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 60°C (140°F).
· Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet.
· Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

SPA1951
Mechanical key
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the driver's door and glove box.

CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your existing key can be duplicated without knowing the key number. As many as four NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the registration process, these components will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration. Any key that is not given to the dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

DOORS

CAUTION
Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which contains an electrical transponder, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect system function.

When the doors are locked using one of the following methods, the doors cannot be opened using the inside or outside door handles. The doors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING
· Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.
· To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

LPD2309
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver's or front passen-
ger's side) to the lock position O1 . When
locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver's or front pas-
senger's side) to the unlock position O2 .

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® SYSTEM

Lockout protection
When any door is open and the power door lock switch is moved to the lock position, all doors will lock and unlock automatically.
These functions help to prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle.

LPD3085
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors.
When the lever is in the unlock position O2 ,
the door can be opened from the outside or the inside.
When the lever is in the LOCK position O1 ,
the door can be opened only from the outside.

WARNING
· Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
· The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed. The FAA advises the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door locks using the remote control function or pushing the request switch (if so equipped) on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation.
Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key system.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

CAUTION
· Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle.
· Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio waves. Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key system under the following operating conditions:
· When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station.
· When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone, transceiver or a CB radio.
· When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials.
· When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby.
· When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal computer.
· When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Key Battery Low warning will show on the vehicle information display after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter.
For additional information, see "Pushbutton ignition switch" (P. 5-10) and "Battery replacement" (P. 8-21).
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent Key: · Do not allow the Intelligent Key,
which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function. · Do not drop the Intelligent Key. · Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object. · Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2402
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request
switch (if so equipped) O1 .

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
The operating range is within 80 cm (31.50 in) from each request switch (if so
equipped) O1 .
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, handle or rear bumper, the request switches (if so equipped) may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the request switch (if so equipped) to lock/unlock the doors.

LPD3086
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors and trunk lid without taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you can lock or unlock all doors and trunk lid by pushing the door handle request switch (if so equipped) within the range of operation.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

Locking doors

LPD3087

LPD2401
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position (Continuously Variable Transmission only) or the N (Neutral) position and apply the parking brake (manual transmission only), place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you.
2. Close all doors.
3. Push any door handle request switch (if
so equipped) O1 while carrying the Intel-
ligent Key with you.
4. All doors and the trunk will lock.

5. The hazard indicator lights flash twice and the outside chime sounds twice.
NOTE: · Doors and trunk lid lock with the door
handle request switch (if so equipped) while the ignition switch is not in the LOCK position. · Doors and trunk lid do not lock by pushing the door handle request switch (if so equipped) and a buzzard sounds while any door is open. However, the driver's door can be locked using the mechanical even if any door is open.
WARNING
After locking the doors using the request switch, make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. Failure to follow these instructions may result in inadvertently unlocking the doors, which may decrease the safety and security of your vehicle.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CAUTION
· When locking the doors using the request switch, make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession before operating the request switch (if so equipped) to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle.
· The request switch is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.
The doors do not lock with the request switch (if so equipped) with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle or when any door is open. A chime will sound to warn you. However, if an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle with all the doors closed, the doors can be locked with another Intelligent Key.

NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelligent Key is in the same hand that is operating the request switch (if so equipped) to lock the door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or your other hand.
CAUTION
The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions: · When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the instrument panel. · When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the rear parcel shelf. · When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the glove box or a storage bin. · When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the door pockets. · When the Intelligent Key is placed on
or under the spare tire area. · When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side or near metallic materials.

Unlocking doors
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Push the door handle request switch (if
so equipped) O1 .
3. The hazard indicator lights flash once and the outside buzzer sounds once.
4. Push the door handle request switch (if
so equipped) O1 again within 5 seconds
to unlock all doors.
NOTE:
Request switches (if so equipped) for all doors can be deactivated using the Ext. Door Switch toggle in the "Vehicle Settings" menu on the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) TYPE A" (P. 2-17) or "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type B" (P. 2-32).
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door. If the door does not unlock after returning the door handle, push the door handle request switch (if so equipped) to unlock the door.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

LPD3088
Opening the trunk lid
1. Push the trunk opener request switch (if
so equipped) OA while carrying the Intel-
ligent Key with you.
2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound three times.
3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 10 m (33 ft) away from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not function under the following conditions: · The Intelligent Key is not within the opera-
tional range. · The doors or the trunk are open or not
closed securely. · The Intelligent Key battery is discharged.
CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle.

Type A (if so equipped)

(lock) button

(unlock) button

(trunk) button

(panic) button

LPD3601

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD3603

(remote engine start) button

(lock) button

(unlock) button

(trunk) button

(panic) button

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.

2. Close all doors.

3. Press the gent Key.

button on the Intelli-

4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice and the horn beeps once.

5. All doors and the trunk will be locked.

WARNING
After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. Failure to follow these instructions may result in inadvertently unlocking the doors, which may decrease the safety and security of your vehicle.

Unlocking doors

1. Press the

button on the Intelligent

Key to unlock the driver's door.

2. The hazard indicator lights flash once.

3. Press the

button again within 5

seconds to unlock all doors and trunk.

All doors and trunk lid will be locked auto-

matically unless one of the following op-

erations is performed within 1 minute after

pressing the

button:

· Opening any doors or trunk lid.

· Pushing the ignition switch.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

Using the interior lights
The interior lights illuminate for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the interior lights switch is in the DOOR position.
The interior lights can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations: · Placing the ignition switch in the ON
position. · Locking the doors with the request
switch (if so equipped) or the Intelligent Key. · Switching the interior light switch to the OFF position.
For additional information, see "Interior lights" (P. 2-70).

Releasing the trunk lid

Press the

button for 0.5 seconds to

open the trunk lid. The trunk release button

will not operate when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding the
button on the Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a period of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

· It has run for a period of time.

(unlock) button is pressed on the

Intelligent Key.

WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning light comes on in the instrument panel.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continuously Variable Transmission only)

Symptom

Possible Cause

Remedy

When pushing the ignition switch to stop the engine

The Shift to Park warning appears in the display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously.

The shift lever is not in the P (Park) po- Make sure that the shift lever is in the

sition.

P (Park) position.

When opening the driver's door

The Push Ignition to OFF warning appears in the display and a warning chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.

When pushing the door handle request switch (if so equipped) to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for a few seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with

or the trunk.

you.

The Shift to Park warning appears in the display and the outside chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF Make sure that the shift lever is in the

position and the shift lever is not in the P (Park) position and place the ignition

P (Park) position.

switch in the OFF position.

When closing the doors

Few seconds after closing the driver

door, the Rear Door Alert warning mes-

sage appears on the display, the horn sounds 3 times, or a Check Rear Seat

The Rear Door Alert is activated.

for All Articles warning appears on the

display.

Check the back seat for all articles, press the OK button to clear the Rear Door Alert warning message.

The outside chime sounds for approxi- The Intelligent Key is in the vehicle or Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with

mately 3 seconds and all doors unlock. trunk.

you.

When closing the trunk lid

The outside chime sounds for a few seconds and the trunk lid opens.

The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pressing the

button on The outside chime sounds for a few

the Intelligent Key to the lock the door seconds and all the doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or the trunk.
A door is not closed securely.

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Close the doors securely.

When pushing the ignition switch to start the engine

The Key Battery Low warning shows in the vehicle information display.

The battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, see "Battery replacement" (P. 8-21).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Manual Transmission only)

Symptom

Possible Cause

The No Key Press and hold to Stop En-

When the parking brake is fully applied

gine warning message appears on the display and the inside warning chime

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

sounds continuously.

When pushing the door handle request switch (if so equipped) to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for a few seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or the trunk.

The key warning light in the instrument

panel illuminates, the outside chime sounds three times and the inside warning chime sounds for approxi-

The ignition switch is in the ACC position.

mately 3 seconds.

When closing the doors

The Rear Door Alert warning message appears on the display, the horn sounds three times, or a Check Rear The Rear Door Alert is activated. Seat for All Articles warning appears on the display.

The outside chime sounds for approxi- The Intelligent Key is in the vehicle or mately 3 seconds and all doors unlock. trunk.

When pushing the ignition switch to start the engine

The Key Battery Low warning shows in the vehicle information display.

The battery charge is low.

Remedy
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
Check the back seat for all articles, press the OK button to clear the Rear Door Alert warning message.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you. Replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, see "Battery replacement" (P. 8-21).

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)

LPD2995

The

button will be on the NISSAN

Intelligent Key® if the vehicle has Remote

Engine Start. This feature allows the engine

to start from outside the vehicle.

The following features may be affected when the Remote Engine Start feature is used:
· Vehicles with a manual climate control system (if so equipped) will default to the last used heating or cooling mode.

· Vehicles with an automatic climate control system (if so equipped) will default to either heating or cooling mode. For additional information, see "Remote Engine Start with Intelligent Climate Control" (P. 4-39).
Laws in some local communities may restrict or prohibit the use of Remote Engine Start, or the amount of time a parked vehicle engine may idle. For example, some laws require a person using Remote Engine Start to have the vehicle in view or may restrict idling time except in freezing temperatures. Check local regulations for any requirements.
Other conditions may affect the function of the Remote Engine Start feature. For additional information, see "Conditions the Remote Engine Start will not work" (P. 3-17).
Other conditions can affect the performance of the Intelligent Key transmitter. For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key® system" (P. 3-5).

REMOTE ENGINE START OPERATING RANGE
WARNING
· To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
· Do not use Remote Engine Start in closed spaces such as a garage. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

CAUTION

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or other strong radio wave sources are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
The Remote Engine Start function can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the vehicle.
The Remote Engine Start operating range is approximately 60 m (197 ft) from the vehicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE

To use the Remote Engine Start feature to start the engine perform the following:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Press the

button to lock all doors.

3. Within 5 seconds press and hold the

button until the turn signal lights

flash and the tail lamps turn on. If the

vehicle is not within view press and hold

the

button for at least 2 seconds.

The following events will occur when the engine starts:
· The parking lights will turn on and remain on as long as the engine is running.
· The doors will be locked and the climate control system may come on.
· The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend the time for an additional 10 minutes. For additional information, see "Extending engine run time" (P. 3-16).
Press and hold the brake then push the push-button ignition switch to the ON position before driving. For additional information, see "Driving the vehicle" (P. 5-15).
EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME
The Remote Engine Start feature can be extended one time by performing the steps listed in "Remote starting the vehicle" in this section. Run time will be calculated as follows:
· The first 10minute run time will start when the Remote Engine Start function is performed.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

· The second 10 minutes will start immediately when the Remote Engine Start function is performed again. For example, if the engine has been running for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are added, the engine will run for a total of 15 minutes.
· Extending engine run time will bring you to the two Remote Engine Start limit.
A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts, or a single start with an extension, are allowed between ignition cycles.
The vehicle must be driven to at least 7 km/h (4 mph) before the Remote Engine Start procedure can be used again.

CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE START

To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform one of the following:

· Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and

press

until the parking lights turn off.

· Turn on the hazard indicator flashers.

· Cycle the ignition switch on and then off.

· The extended engine run time has expired.

· The first 10minute timer has expired.

· The engine hood has been opened.

· The vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

HOOD

· The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.
· The ignition switch is pushed without an Intelligent Key in the vehicle.
· The ignition switch is pushed with an Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the brake pedal is not depressed.

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE START WILL NOT WORK

The Remote Engine Start will not operate if any of the following conditions are present:

· The ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

· The hood is not securely closed.

· The hazard indicator lights are on.

· The engine is still running. The engine must be completely stopped. Wait at least 6 seconds if the engine goes from running to off. This is not applicable when extending engine run time.

· The

button is not pressed and held

for at least 2 seconds.

· The

button is not pressed and held

within 5 seconds of pressing the lock

button.

· The brake is pressed.

· The doors are not closed and locked.

· The trunk is open.
· The Key System Error warning shows in the vehicle information display.
· The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.
· Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single Remote Engine Start with an extension, have already been used.
· The vehicle is not in P (Park).
· There is a detected registered key already inside of the vehicle.

1. Pull the hood lock release lever located on the pillar by the driver's door. The hood will spring up slightly.
2. Push the lever at the front of the hood towards the passenger side of the vehicle with your fingertips and raise the hood.
3. Insert the support rod into the slot on the underside of the hood.
When closing the hood, return the support rod to its original position, lower the hood to approximately 30 cm (12 in) above the latch and release it. This allows proper engagement of the hood latch.
WARNING
· Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident.
· If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

TRUNK LID

LPD2868
Instrument panel
TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCH
WARNING
· Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For additional information, see "Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)" (P. 5-4).

· Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children's access to car keys.
To open the trunk lid, push the opener switch.
To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid down securely.
NOTE:
You can open the trunk lid with the Intelligent Key. For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key® system" (P. 3-5).

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2081
INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE
WARNING
Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children's access to car keys.
The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk.

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illuminated release handle until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light.
The handle is located inside the trunk compartment on the interior of the trunk lid.
INTERIOR TRUNK ACCESS
The trunk can be accessed from the driver's side or the passenger side of the rear seat.
1. Move the front seat to the most forward position.
2. Pull up on the knob on the rear seatback.
3. Fold down the driver's or passenger's side seatback.
For additional information, see "Seats" (P. 1-2).

WARNING
· Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury or death in an accident or sudden stop.
· Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
· When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
· Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children's access to car keys.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

· Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling.

· Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

· Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has

a built-in safety valve needed for

proper operation of the fuel system

and emission control system. An in-

correct cap can result in a serious

malfunction and possible injury. It

could also cause the

Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light (MIL) to come on.

· Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

STEERING WHEEL

· Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers:
Always place the container on the ground when filling.
Do not use electronic devices when filling.
Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are filling it.
Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

· The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning mes-

sage will appear if the fuel-filler cap

is not properly tightened. It may take

a few driving trips for the message to

be displayed. Failure to tighten the

fuel-filler cap properly after the

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message

appears may cause the

Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL) to

illuminate.

· Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the

Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL) to illu-

minate. If the

light illuminates

because the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle. The

light should turn off after a few

driving trips. If the light does not

turn off after a few driving trips, have

the vehicle inspected. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

· For additional information, see "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" (P. 2-13).

· If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

MIRRORS

LPD3092
TILT AND TELESCOPIC OPERATION
Push the lock lever O1 down:
· Adjust the steering wheel up or down in
direction O2 to the desired position.
· Adjust the steering wheel forward or
backward in direction O3 to the desired
position.
Pull the lock lever O1 up firmly to lock the
steering wheel in place.

WPD0126
MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
Use the night position O1 to reduce glare
from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
Use the day position O2 when driving in
daylight hours.
WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

WPD0446
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims during night time conditions and according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare feature is activated when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sen-
sors O1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors O1 . Doing so will reduce the sensitiv-
ity of the sensors, resulting in improper
operation.
The indicator light O2 will illuminate when
the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

With the ignition switch placed in the ON

position, press the

button as de-

scribed:

· To turn off the anti-glare feature, press

and hold the

button for 8 seconds.

The indicator light will turn off.

· To turn on the anti-glare feature, press

and hold the

button again for 8

seconds. The indicator light will turn on.

LPD2452
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
Move the small switch O1 to select the right
or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the de-
sired position using the large switch O2 .

WARNING
· Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

· Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

LPD2840
Power folding outside mirrors (if so equipped)

Push the switch O1 to open the mirrors.
Push the switch again to close the mirrors.
If one of the mirrors are manually operated or bumped, the mirror body can become loose at the pivot point. To correct electronic mirror operation, cycle the mirrors by
pushing the switch O1 until completely
closed, then push the switch again until the mirrors are in the open position
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
The electric control type outside mirrors can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For additional information, see "Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defogger switch" (P. 2-52).

CAUTION
· Do not touch the mirrors while they are moving. Your hand may be pinched, and the mirror may malfunction.
· Do not drive with the mirrors stored. You will be unable to see behind the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NissanConnect® Owner's Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

How to use the touch-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

How to use the

MENU button . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

(brightness control) or DISP button . . . . . . 4-8

How to use the VOL (volume) knob /

PUSH (power) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Selecting menu from launch bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

RearView Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . 4-10

How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Difference between predicted and

actual distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11

How to park with predicted course

lines (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

How to turn on and off predicted

course lines (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . 4-14

System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Intelligent Around View Monitor

(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Intelligent Around View Monitor system

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Difference between predicted and

actual distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

How to park with predicted course lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 How to switch the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Intelligent Around View Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Moving Object Detection (MOD) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
MOD system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Turning MOD on and off (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-32 MOD system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Heater and air conditioner (manual) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Heater and air conditioner (automatic) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 FM/AM radio (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 4-47 FM/AM radio (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 4-50 USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port & iPod®* Connection Port (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port & iPod®* connection port (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56 Bluetooth® streaming audio (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62 Bluetooth® streaming audio (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . 4-66 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
USB/iPod® charging port (if so equipped) . . . . . . .4-68
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-68
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70 Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70 Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70

Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 Dialing a number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72 Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72 Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72 During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72 Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72 Volume control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74 Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75 Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76 Bluetooth® connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76 Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77 Phone display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-80 Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-80 Receiving/Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81 During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81 Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81 Bluetooth® connections screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-85 Phone and text message settings . . . . . . . . . . .4-86 Volume & beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88
iPod®/iPhone® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88

NISSANCONNECT® OWNER'S MANUAL

Refer to the NissanConnect® Owner's Manual that includes the following information. · NissanConnect® Services (if so equipped) · Audio system · Apple CarPlay® · Android AutoTM · Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system · Navigation (if so equipped) · Viewing information · Other settings · Voice recognition · General system information

WARNING
· Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls and display controls should not be done while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation.
· Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electrical shock.
· Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock.
· In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS

* For additional information, see "Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System" (P. 4-73) regarding the Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System control button.
When you use this system, make sure the engine is running.
If you use the system with the engine not running for a long time, it will discharge the battery, and the engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
"Example" -- Words marked in quotes refer to a key shown only on the display. These keys can be selected by touching the screen.

1. Display screen

2. TUNE·SCROLL knob / PUSH SOUND button

BACK button

4. DISP button

button*

LHA4960

MENU button

(brightness control) button

8. VOL (volume) knob / PUSH button

(power)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN
CAUTION
· The glass display screen may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the glass screen breaks, do not touch it. Doing so could result in an injury.
· To clean the display, never use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent. They will scratch or deteriorate the panel.
· Do not splash any liquid such as water or car fragrance on the display. Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction.
To help ensure safe driving, some functions cannot be operated while driving.
The on-screen functions that are not available while driving will be "grayed out" or muted.

WARNING
· ALWAYS give your full attention to driving.
· Avoid using vehicle features that could distract you. If distracted, you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

Touch-screen operation

LHA4700

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Menu Item Selecting the item
Adjusting the item
Inputting characters 123 OK

Result

Touch an item to select. To select the "Phone" key, touch the "Phone" key on the screen.

Touch the "

" key to return to the previous screen.

Touch the "+" key or the "-" key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one item at a time. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time.

Touch the number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.

Touch to manually enter numbers.

Completes the character input.

Touch-screen maintenance

If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray the screen with water or detergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the screen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

LHA4706

HOW TO USE THE BUTTON

To select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle:

1. Press the

MENU button.

2. Touch the "Settings" key.

3. Touch the desired item.

LHA4700

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Settings

Menu item

Result

Touch to change the following settings.

Connections

Touch this key to select either Bluetooth® phone, Bluetooth® audio or USB audio options. For additional information, see "USB connections screen" (P. 4-57) and "Bluetooth® connections screen" (P. 4-85).

Phone

For additional information, see "Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (Type B)" (P. 4-73).

Sound

For additional information, see "Audio system" (P. 4-42).

Volume & Beeps

For additional information, see "Volume & beeps" (P. 4-88).

Clock

Touch this key to adjust clock settings.

On-Screen Clock

Touch to toggle ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.

Clock Format Touch to set the clock to 12 hour or 24 hour formats.

Summer Time Touch to toggle the summer time feature ON or OFF.

Set Clock Manually

Touch to adjust the clock manually; then touch to change between AM and PM, the hour and the minutes.

System Voice (if so equipped)

For additional information, see "Settings" (P. 4-79).

Camera

Touch this key to change the camera settings.

Others

Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will appear.

Display

Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display. For additional information, see "Adjusting the screen" (P. 4-14, 4-25).

Language

Touch this key to change the language on the display.

Radio Fre-

Touch this key to change the radio frequency range and step settings.

quency Range

and Step

OSS Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information.

Return All Set- Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory. tings to Default

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

(brightness control) OR DISP BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press the button or DISP button. Pressing the
button again will change the display to the day or the night display.

Press and hold the

button or DISP

button for more than 2 seconds to turn the

display off. Press and hold the button again

to turn the display on.

HOW TO USE THE VOL (volume) KNOB / PUSH (power) BUTTON
Press the PUSH (power) button to turn audio function on and off. Turn the VOL (volume) knob to adjust audio volume.

LHA4707
SELECTING MENU FROM LAUNCH BAR
Various system functions can be accessed by touching the items on the Launch Bar
O1 which is displayed on most of the main
menu screens (the Launch Bar does not appear on some screens such as settings screens, camera screens, etc.)
Touch the keys on the Launch Bar to display the corresponding menu screens.

The following menu items are available on the Launch Bar: · AM · FM · USB/iPod · Bluetooth · AUX · Settings

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

1. CAMERA button
WARNING
· Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RearView Monitor system could result in serious injury or death.

· RearView Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and look out the windows and check mirrors to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always back up slowly.

LHA5320
· The system is designed as an aid to the driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to help avoid damaging the vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

· The distance guide lines and the vehicle width lines should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.
The RearView Monitor system automatically shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position. The radio can still be heard while the RearView Monitor is active.

LHA5321
To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor system uses a camera located just
above the vehicle's license plate O1 .
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the RearView Monitor.

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1196
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with refer-
ence to the vehicle body line OA are dis-
played on the monitor.
Distance guide lines
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
· Red line O1 : approx. 0.5 m (1.5 ft) · Yellow line O2 : approx. 1 m (3 ft) · Green line O3 : approx. 2 m (7 ft)) · Green line O4 : approx. 3 m (10 ft) (if so
equipped)

Vehicle width guide lines O5
Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.
Predicted course lines O6 (if so equipped)
Indicate the predicted course when backing up. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position.
The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

LHA5322
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

LHA5323

LHA4995

Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up near a projecting object
The predicted course lines OA (if so
equipped) do not touch the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course.

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA5324
Backing up behind a projecting object
The position OC is shown farther than the position OB in the display. However, the position OC is actually at the same distance as the position OA . The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position OA
if the object projects over the actual backing up course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES (if so equipped)

WARNING
· If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.
· On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line.
· If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures:
Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock while the engine is running.
Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes.
· When the steering wheel is turned with the ignition switch in the ACC position, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.

LHA5043
1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed
on the screen OA when the shift lever is
moved to the R (Reverse) position.

LHA4770
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the predicted
course lines OB enter the parking space OC .

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make
the vehicle width guide lines OD parallel to the parking space OC while referring
to the predicted course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake.

LHA3522
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
1. While on the main menu screen, touch the "Settings" key.
2. Touch the "Camera" key.
3. Touch the "Display Settings" key.
4. Touch the "Brightness", "Contrast", Tint", "Color", or "Black Level" key.
5. Adjust the item by touching the "+" or "" key on the touch-screen display.

NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving.
HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF PREDICTED COURSE LINES (if so equipped)
To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course lines while in the P (Park) position:
1. Touch the "Settings" key.
2. Touch the "Camera" key.
3. Touch the "Predicted Course Lines" key to turn the feature ON or OFF.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. · The system cannot completely elimi-
nate blind spots and may not show every object.

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

· Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limitation. The system will not show small objects below the bumper, and may not show objects close to the bumper or on the ground.
· Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used.
· Objects in the RearView Monitor will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.
· Use the displayed lines as a reference. The lines are highly affected by the number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road conditions and road grade.
· Make sure that the trunk is securely closed when backing up.
· Do not put anything on the rearview camera. The rearview camera is installed above the license plate.

· When washing the vehicle with high pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the camera. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
· Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction:
· When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not clearly display objects.
· When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.
· Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper.
· The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
· The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.
· Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark environment.

· There may be a delay when switching between views.
· If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the camera, the RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera.
· Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
camera O1 , the RearView Monitor may not
display objects clearly. Clean the camera
by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a
diluted mild cleaning agent and then wip-
ing it with a dry cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

LHA5321

CAUTION
· Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
· Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

1. CAMERA button

LHA5320
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for the proper use of the Intelligent Around View Monitor system could result in serious injury or death · The Intelligent Around View Monitor
is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation because it has areas where objects cannot be viewed. The four corners of the vehicle in particular, are areas where objects do not always appear in the bird's-eye, front, or rear views. Always check your surroundings to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always operate the vehicle slowly. · The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.

The Intelligent Around View Monitor system is designed as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot parking or parallel parking.
The monitor displays various views of the position of the vehicle in a split screen format. Not all views are available at all times.
Available views:
· Front View An approximately 150degree view of the front of the vehicle.
· Rear View An approximately 150degree view of the rear of the vehicle.
· Bird's-Eye View The surrounding views of the vehicle from above.
· Front-Side View The view around and ahead of the front passenger's side wheel.
· Full Screen Rear View (if so equipped) The view to the rear of the vehicle (which is a little wider than the standard Rear View).

LHA5325
To display the multiple views, the Intelligent Around View Monitor system uses cameras located in the front grille, on the vehicle's outside mirrors and one just above
the vehicle's license plate O1 .
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position or press the CAMERA button to operate the Intelligent Around View Monitor.

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The screen displayed on the Intelligent Around View Monitor will automatically return to the previous screen 3 minutes after the CAMERA button has been pressed with the shift lever in a position other than the R (Reverse) position.
Available views
WARNING
· The distance guide lines and the vehicle width lines should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a paved, level surface. The apparent distance viewed on the monitor may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.
· Use the displayed lines and the bird's-eye view as a reference. The lines and the bird's-eye view are greatly affected by the number of occupants, cargo, fuel level, vehicle position, road condition and road grade.
· If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines and the bird's-eye view may be displayed incorrectly.

· When driving the vehicle up a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are further than they appear. When driving the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are closer than they appear.
· Objects in the rear view will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the monitor and outside mirrors.
· Use the mirrors or actually look to properly judge distances to other objects.
· On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course lines and the actual course line.
· The vehicle width and predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course.
· The displayed lines will appear slightly off to the right, because the rearview camera is not installed in the rear center of the vehicle.

Front view

SAA1840

Front and rear view
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate vehicle width and distance to objects with
reference to the vehicle body line OA are
displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the vehicle body:
· Red line O1 : approximately 0.5 m (1.5 ft) · Yellow line O2 : approximately 1 m (3 ft) · Green line O3 : approximately 2 m (7 ft) · Green line O4 : approximately 3 m (10 ft)
(if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle speed is above 10 km/h (6 mph).
NOTE:
When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the straightahead position, both the right and left
predicted course lines O6 are displayed.
When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, a line is displayed only on the opposite side of the turn.

Rear view
Vehicle width guide lines O5 :

LHA4992

Indicate the approximate vehicle width when backing up.

Predicted course lines O6 :

Indicate the predicted course when operating the vehicle. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position.

Front view Bird's-eye view

LHA4534

The bird's-eye view shows the overhead view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle position and the predicted course to a parking space.

The vehicle icon O1 shows the position of
the vehicle. Note that the apparent dis-
tance between objects viewed in the
bird's-eye view may differ somewhat from
the actual distance to the vehicle.

The areas that the cameras cannot cover
O2 are indicated in black.

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4535
Rear view
The non-viewable area O2 is highlighted in
yellow for several seconds after the bird'seye view is displayed. It will be shown only the first time after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
In addition, the non-viewable corners are displayed in red and blink for the first 3
seconds O3 to remind the driver to be
cautious.

Predicted course lines O4 (if so equipped)
indicate the predicted course when operating the vehicle. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the neutral position.
When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the neutral position, the two green predicted course lines are shown in front of the vehicle.
When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, one green predicted course line is shown in front of the vehicle and the other predicted course line is shown at the side of the vehicle.
When the monitor displays the rear view, the predicted course lines are shown at the back of the vehicle.

WARNING
· Objects in the bird's-eye view will appear further than the actual distance.
· Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle, may be misaligned or not displayed at the seam of the views.
· Objects that are above the camera cannot be displayed.
· The view of the bird's-eye view may be misaligned when the camera position alters.
· A line on the ground may be misaligned and is not seen as being straight at the seam of the views. The misalignment will increase as the line proceeds away from the vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

LHA2652
Front-side view
Guiding lines
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate width and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor.
The front-of-vehicle line O1 shows the front
part of the vehicle.
The side-of-vehicle line O2 shows the ap-
proximate vehicle width including the outside mirrors.
The extensions O3 of both the front O1 and side O2 lines are shown with a green dotted
line.

LHA4819
Full screen rear view Full screen rear view (if so equipped)
The full screen rear view shows a wider area on the entire screen and allows the checking of the blind corners on right and left sides. The full screen rear view displays an approximately 180-degree area.
Distance guide lines
Indicates distances from the vehicle body:
· Red line O1 : approximately 0.5 m (1.5 ft) · Yellow line O2 : approximately 1 m (3 ft) · Green line O3 : approximately 2 m (7 ft)

Vehicle width guide lines O4
Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA5323
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

LHA4995
Backing up near a projecting object
The predicted course lines OA do not touch
the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

object when backing up to the position OA
if the object projects over the actual backing up course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4770
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the predicted course
lines OB enter the parking space OC .
4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make
the vehicle width guide lines OD parallel to the parking space OC while referring
to the predicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake.

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press the CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the Intelligent Around View Monitor.
The Intelligent Around View Monitor displays different split screen views depending on the position of the shift lever. Press the CAMERA button to switch between the available views.
If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the available views are:
· Rear view/bird's-eye view split screen
· Rear view/front-side view split screen
· Full screen rear view (if so equipped)
If the shift lever is in the P (Park) or D (Drive) position, the available views are:
· Front view/bird's-eye view split screen
· Front view/front-side view split screen
The display will switch from the Intelligent Around View Monitor screen when: · The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position
and the vehicle speed increases above approximately 10 km/h (6 mph).
· A different screen is selected.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

LHA3522

1. While on the main menu screen, touch the "Settings" key.

2. Use the arrow to tab to the next screen and touch the "Camera" key.

3. Touch the "Display Settings" key.

4. Touch the "Brightness", "Contrast", Tint", "Color", or "Black Level" key.

5. Adjust the item by touching the "+" or "" key on the touch-screen display.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

NOTE: Do not adjust any of the display settings of the Intelligent Around View Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.
LHA5326
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for Intelligent Around View Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
· Do not use the Intelligent Around View Monitor with the outside mirrors in the stored position, and make sure that the trunk is securely closed when operating the vehicle using the Intelligent Around View Monitor.
· The apparent distance between objects viewed on the Intelligent Around View Monitor differs from the actual distance.
· The cameras are installed on the front grille, the outside mirrors and above the rear license plate. Do not put anything such as a license plate frame on the vehicle that covers or blocks the view of the cameras.
· When washing the vehicle with high pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the cameras. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

· Do not strike the cameras. They are precision instruments. Doing so could cause a malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
There are some areas where the system will not show objects and the system does not warn of moving objects. When in the front or rear view display, an object below the bumper or on the ground may not be
viewed O1 . When in the bird's-eye view, a tall object near the seam O2 of the camera
viewing areas will not appear in the monitor.
The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction:
· There may be a delay when switching between views.
· When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly.
· When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.
· The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
· The colors of objects on the Intelligent Around View Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.

· Objects on the Intelligent Around View Monitor may not be clear and the color of the object may differ in a dark environment.
· There may be differences in sharpness between each camera view of the bird'seye view.
· Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that has been dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.
LHA3592
System temporarily unavailable
When the "[X]" icon is displayed on the screen, there are abnormal conditions in the Intelligent Around View Monitor. This will not hinder normal driving operation but the system should be inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of
the cameras O1 , the Intelligent Around
View Monitor may not display objects
clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a
cloth dampened with a diluted mild clean-
ing agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

LHA3591
When the "!" icon is displayed on the screen, the camera image may be receiving temporary electronic disturbances from surrounding devices. This will not hinder normal driving operation but the system should be inspected if it occurs frequently. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

LHA5325

CAUTION
· Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
· Do not damage the cameras as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD) (if so equipped)

1. CAMERA button

LHA5320
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Moving Object Detection (MOD) system could result in serious injury or death
· The MOD system is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation and is not designed to prevent contact with objects surrounding the vehicle. When maneuvering, always use the outside mirrors and rearview mirror and turn and check the surroundings to ensure it is safe to maneuver.
· The system is deactivated at speeds above 8 km/h (5 mph). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
· The MOD system is not designed to detect surrounding stationary objects.
The MOD system can inform the driver of moving objects near the vehicle when backing out of garages, maneuvering in parking lots and in other such instances.
The MOD system detects moving objects by using image processing technology on the image shown in the display.

MOD SYSTEM OPERATION
The MOD system will turn on automatically under the following conditions:
· When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
· When the CAMERA button is pressed to activate the camera view on the display.
· When vehicle speed decreases below approximately 10 km/h (6 mph) and the camera screen is displayed.

LHA4190
Front and bird's-eye views
The MOD system operates in the following conditions when the camera view is displayed:
· When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position and the vehicle is stopped, the MOD system detects moving objects in the bird's-eye view. The MOD system will not operate if the outside mirrors are moving in or out, in the stowed position, or if either front door is opened.

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA5171
Rear and bird's-eye views
· When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 10 km/h (6 mph) , the MOD system detects moving objects in the front view.
· When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 10 km/h (6 mph), the MOD system detects moving objects in the rear view. The MOD system will not operate if the trunk is open.

LHA4997
Rear and front-side views
The MOD system does not detect moving objects in the front-side view. The MOD icon is not displayed on the screen when in this view.
When the MOD system detects moving objects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard when in front or rear view and a yellow frame will be displayed on the view where the objects are detected. While the MOD system continues to detect moving objects, the yellow frame continues to be displayed.

LHA4998
Full screen rear view (if so equipped) NOTE:
While the RCTA chime (if so equipped) is beeping, the MOD system does not chime.
In the bird's-eye view, the yellow frame O1 is
displayed on each camera image (front, rear, right, left) depending on where moving objects are detected.
The yellow frame O2 is displayed on each
view in the front view and rear view modes.
A blue MOD icon O3 is displayed in the view
where the MOD system is operative. A gray MOD icon is displayed in the view where the MOD system is not operative.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD
icon O3 is not displayed.
TURNING MOD ON AND OFF (if so equipped)
Some vehicles include the option to allow the MOD system to be turned on or off.
To turn the MOD system on or off:
1. Touch the "Setting" key.
2. Touch the "Camera" key.
3. Touch the "Moving Object Detection" key to switch between ON or OFF.
MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. · Do not use the MOD system when
towing a trailer. The system may not function properly. · Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume or open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

· The MOD system performance will be limited according to environmental conditions and surrounding objects such as:
When there is low contrast between background and the moving objects.
When there is a blinking source of light.
When strong light such as another vehicle's headlight or sunlight is present.
When camera orientation is not in its usual position, such as when a mirror is folded.
When there is dirt, water drops or snow on the camera lens.
When the position of the moving objects in the display is not changed.
· The MOD system might detect flowing water droplets on the camera lens, white smoke from the muffler, moving shadows, etc.
· The MOD system may not function properly depending on the speed, direction, distance or shape of the moving objects.

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

· If your vehicle sustains damage to the parts where the camera is installed, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered and the MOD system may not detect objects properly.
· When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly. This is not a malfunction.
NOTE:
The blue MOD icon will change to orange if one of the following has occurred:
· When the system is malfunctioning. · When the component temperature
reaches a high level (icon will blink). · When the RearView camera has detected
a blockage (icon will blink).
If the icon light continues to illuminate orange, have the MOD system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of
the cameras O1 , the MOD system may not
operate properly. Clean the camera by wip-
ing with a cloth dampened with a diluted
mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a
dry cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

LHA5325

CAUTION
· Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
· Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (manual) (if so equipped)
3

LHA4947

Fan speed control dial / system

OFF dial

Front windshield defogger button

Rear window defogger switch

Air recirculation button

5. Temperature control dial

6. Air flow control buttons

7. A/C (air conditioner) button

WARNING
· The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

· Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
· Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.
NOTE:
· Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents.
· When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle.

CONTROLS

Fan speed control dial

The

fan speed control dial turns the

fan on and off and controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttons
The air flow control buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets.
-- Air flows from center and side vents.
-- Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets.
-- Air flows mainly from foot outlets. -- Air flows from defogger outlets
and foot outlets. -- Air flows mainly from defogger
outlets.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

On position (Indicator light on): Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Press the when:

button to the on position

· driving on a dusty road.

· to prevent traffic fumes from entering passenger compartment.

· for maximum cooling when using the air conditioner.

Off position (Indicator light off): Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment and distributed through the selected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air conditioner operation.

A/C (air conditioner) button

Start the engine, turn the

fan speed

control dial to the desired position and

press the

button to turn on the air

conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner,

press the

button again.

The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defogger switch
For additional information, see "Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defogger switch" (P. 2-52).
HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot outlets. Some air also flows from the defog outlets and the side vent outlets.

1. Press the

button to the off position

for normal heating.

2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side and center vents.

1. Press the

button to the off position.

2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Defogging

This mode directs the air to the defog outlets to defog the windows.

1. Press the

air flow control button.

2. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.

· To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-

dows, turn the

fan speed control dial

to the right and the temperature control

to the full HOT position.

· When the

position is selected, the air

conditioner automatically turns on if the

outside temperature is more than 2°C

(36°F). This dehumidifies the air which

helps defog the windshield. The

mode automatically turns off, allowing

outside air to be drawn into the passen-

ger compartment to further improve the

defogging performance. Recirculation air

intake cannot be activated in

mode

position.

Bi-level heating

The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side and center vents and to the front and rear floor outlets.

1. Press the

button to the off position.

2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield.

1. Press the

air flow control button.

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

2. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the

desired position between the middle and the hot position.

· When the

position is selected, the

air conditioner automatically turns on if the outside temperature is more than 2°C (36°F). This dehumidifies the air which

helps defog the windshield. The mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passen-

ger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.

Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield. This improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, turn the

fan speed

control dial to the desired position, and

press the

button to activate the air

conditioner. When the air conditioner is on,

cooling and dehumidifying functions are

added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the

button to the off position.

2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

4. Press the A/C (air conditioner) button. The indicator light comes on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

· For quick cooling when the outside tem-

perature is high, press the

button to

the on position. Be sure to return the

to the off position for normal cooling.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the

button to the off position.

2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

4. Press the A/C (air conditioner) button. The indicator light comes on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the

air flow control button.

2. Turn the

fan speed control dial to

the desired position.

· When the

are selected, the

air conditioner automatically turns on if

the outside temperature is more than 2°C

(36°F) This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. The

mode automatically turns off, allowing

outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the

defogging performance.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Operating tips
· Keep the windows closed while the air conditioner is in operation.

· After parking in the sun, drive for two or three minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows. This allows the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
· The air conditioning system should be operated for approximately ten minutes at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication.
· A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.
· If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, turn the air conditioner off. For additional information, see "If your vehicle overheats" (P. 6-11).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (automatic) (if so equipped)

1. AUTO (automatic) climate control but-

ton / temperature control dial (driver's

side)

2. Display screen

Heated seat (if so equipped) but-

tons

LHA4784

4. SYNC (passenger's side temperature

control) button / temperature control

dial (passenger's side)

5. A/C (air conditioner) button

Air recirculation button

Air flow control button

Fan speed control buttons

Heated steering wheel (if so

equipped) button

10.

Rear window and outside mirror

(if so equipped) defogger switch

11.

Front defogger button

12. ON-OFF button

WARNING

· The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
· Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
· Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.

Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE: · Odors from inside and outside the ve-
hicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents. · When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
1. Press the AUTO button on. The indicator on the button will illuminate.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature.
· Adjust the temperature display to about 24°C (75°F) for normal operation.

· The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
· A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.
3. You can individually set driver's and front passenger's side temperature using each temperature control dial. To synchronize the driver's and front passenger's temperature settings, press the SYNC button.
Heating (A/C OFF)
The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature.
· The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
· Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise, the system may not work properly.

· Not recommended if windows fog up.
Remote Engine Start with Intelligent Climate Control (if so equipped)
Vehicles equipped with automatic climate controls and Remote Engine Start function may go into automatic heating or cooling mode when Remote Engine Start is activated depending on outside and cabin temperatures. During this period, the climate control display and buttons will be inoperable until the ignition switch is turned on. In Remote Engine Start defogging mode, the rear window defogger, heated seats (if so equipped) and heated steering wheel (if so equipped) may be activated automatically.
MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Press the

fan speed control buttons

to manually control the fan speed.

Press the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the dial to the right. Temperature can be adjusted on the driver's and passenger's side.

Air recirculation

Press the

air recirculation button to

recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.

The

indicator light on the button will

come on.

When the outside temperature exceeds 21°C (70°F) the air conditioning system may default to air recirculation mode automatically to reduce overall power consumption. To exit air recirculation mode, deselect the air recirculation button (indicator light will turn off) to enter fresh air mode.

Automatic intake air control

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be

controlled automatically. To manually con-

trol the intake air, press the

air recir-

culation button. To return to the automatic

control mode, press and hold the

air

recirculation button for about 2 seconds.

The indicator light will flash twice, and then the intake air will be controlled automatically.

A/C (air conditioner) button

Start the engine, press the

fan speed

control buttons to the desired position and

press the

button to turn on the air

conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner,

press the

button again.

The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Air flow control

Pressing the

button manually con-

trols air flow and selects the air outlet:

-- Air flows from center and side vents.
-- Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets.
-- Air flows mainly from foot outlets. -- Air flows from defogger and foot
outlets.

Synchronize climate settings
Press the SYNC button to synchronize climate settings. The SYNC indicator will turn on.

Pressing SYNC will synchronize driver's and front passenger's climate settings.
To change climate settings when SYNC is active (the SYNC indicator is on): · The driver's side temperature control dial
will control the driver and front passenger temperatures. · The fan speed control buttons will control the fan speeds.
To exit SYNC: · To remove the front passenger from
SYNC mode, turn the passenger's side temperature control dial. · Pressing the SYNC button will re-activate SYNC mode.
To turn system off
Press the ON-OFF button.
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defogger switch
For additional information, see "Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defogger switch" (P. 2-52).

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4943
OPERATING TIPS
The sunload sensor, located on the top center of the instrument panel, helps the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around this sensor.

· When the climate system is in automatic operation and the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow outlet may default to defogger mode for a maximum of 2 minutes 30 seconds. This is not a malfunction. After the engine coolant temperature warms up, the air flow outlet will return to foot mode and operation will continue normally.
· When the outside and interior cabin temperatures are moderate to high, the intake setting may default to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. You may notice air flow from the foot mode, bi-level mode, or side demist vent outlets for a maximum of 15 seconds. This may occur when the previous climate setting was turned off. This is not a malfunction. After the initial warm air is expelled, the intake will return to automatic control, the air flow outlet will return to previous settings, and operation will continue normally. To exit, press any climate control button.
· Keep the moonroof (if so equipped) closed while the air conditioner is in operation.

· If you feel that the air flow mode you have

selected and the outlets the air is coming

out do not match, select the

mode.

· When you change the air flow mode, you may feel air flow from the foot outlets for just a moment. This is not a malfunction.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

AUDIO SYSTEM

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind.
This refrigerant does not harm the earth's ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. For additional information, see "Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations" (P. 9-7).
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to service your "environmentally friendly" air conditioner system.
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with proper equipment.

RADIO

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and press the PUSH

button

to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio

with the engine not running, the ignition

switch should be placed in the ACC

position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception.
However, there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

area and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system.
Reception conditions will constantly change because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception. Described below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception.
Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 30 mi (40 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example, they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to antenna position (usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter), static or flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.
AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and skip along the ground. In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of these characteristics, AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings. It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
MP3 or WMA terms
· MP3 -- MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the most well-known compressed digital audio file format. This format allows for near "CD quality" sound, but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesn't hear.

· WMA -- Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a compressed audio format created by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality.
· Bit rate -- Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file.
· Sampling frequency -- Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital (A/D conversion) per second.
· Multisession -- Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media. Writing data once to the media is called a single session, and writing more than once is called a multisession.
· ID3/WMA Tag -- The ID3/WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title, artist, encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed on the Artist/ song title line on the display.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

* Windows® and Windows Media® are registered trademarks and trademarks in the United States of America and other countries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port
WARNING
· Do not connect, disconnect or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
· Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port.
· Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.

· Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port.
The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device. USB devices should be purchased separately as necessary.
This system cannot be used to format USB devices. To format a USB device, use a personal computer.
In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the front seats plays only sound without images for regulatory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked.
This system supports various USB memory devices, USB hard drives and iPod® players. Some USB devices may not be supported by this system.
· Partitioned USB devices may not play correctly.
· Some characters used in other languages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear properly in the display. Using English language characters with a USB device is recommended.

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

General notes for USB use:
· For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer's owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device.
Notes for iPod® use:
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
· Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause a checkmark to be displayed on and off (flickering). Always make sure that the iPod® is connected properly.
· An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation. In this case, please manually reset the iPod®.
· An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is disconnected during a seek operation.
· An incorrect song title may appear when the Play Mode is changed while using an iPod® nano (2nd Generation).
· Audiobooks may not play in the same order as they appear on an iPod®.
· Large video files cause slow responses in an iPod®. The vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover.

· If an iPod® automatically selects large video files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover.
iPod®* player
· Some characters used in other languages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed properly on the vehicle center screen. We recommend using English or Spanish language characters with an iPod®.
· Large video podcast files cause slow responses in the iPod®. The vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but it will soon recover.
· If the iPod® automatically selects large video podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but it will soon recover.
· Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause a checkmark to be displayed on and off (flickering). Always make sure that the iPod® is connected properly.
· The iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will continue to fast forward or rewind if it is disconnected during a seek operation.

· An incorrect song title may appear when the Play Mode is changed while using the iPod® nano (2nd Generation).
· Audiobooks may not play in the same order as they appear on the iPod®.
· The iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation. In this case, please manually reset the iPod®.
· If you are using an iPod® (3rd Generation with Dock connector), do not use very long names for the song title, album name or artist name to prevent the iPod® from resetting itself.
· Be careful not to do the following, or the cable could be damaged and a loss of function may occur: Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in (40 mm) radius maximum). Twist the cable excessively (more than 180 degrees). Pull or drop the cable. Do not force the iPod® cable connector into the device port. Close the center console lid on the cable or connectors. Store objects with sharp edges in the storage where the cable is stored.

Spill liquids on the cable and connectors.
· Do not connect the cable to the iPod® if the cable and/or connectors are wet. It may damage the iPod®.
· If the cable and connectors are exposed to water, allow the cable and/or connectors to dry completely before connecting the cable to the iPod® (wait 24 hours for it to dry).
· If the connector is exposed to fluids other than water, evaporative residue may cause a short between the connector pins. In this case, replace the cable, otherwise damage to the iPod® and a loss of function may occur.
· If the cable is damaged (insulation cut, connectors cracked, contamination such as liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connectors), do not use the cable. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to replace the cable with a new one.
· When not in use for extended periods of time, store the cable in a clean, dust free environment at room temperature and without direct sun exposure.
· Do not use the cable for any other purposes other than its intended use in the vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

*iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Bluetooth® streaming audio
· Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not be recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.
· It is necessary to set up the wireless connection between a compatible Bluetooth® audio device and the invehicle Bluetooth® module before using the Bluetooth® audio.
· Operating procedure of the Bluetooth® audio will vary depending on the devices. Make sure how to operate your audio device before using it with this system.
· The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped under the following conditions: Receiving a call on the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Checking the connection to the hands-free phone.
· Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.

· While an audio device is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the device may discharge quicker than usual.
· This system supports the Bluetooth® Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).
BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Visteon.

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

FM/AM RADIO (Type A) (if so equipped)
1. VOL (volume) control knob/ PUSH (power) button
2. Display screen
3. PUSH OK button / MENU knob

(back) button

5. A-Z button

(phone) button*

7. DISP button

8. MEDIA button

LHA5353

9. MIX button

10. RADIO button

11. RPT (repeat) button

12.

SEEK/TRACK buttons

13. SETTING button

14.

(brightness control) button

* For additional information, refer to "Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System" in this section.

Audio main operation

VOL (volume) control knob/PUSH (power) button

Place the ignition switch in the ON position, then press the PUSH (power) button. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, place the ignition in the ON position. The mode that was playing immediately before the system was turned off resumes playing.

Pressing the PUSH

(power) button

again turns the system off.

Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to the right to increase volume or to the left to decrease volume.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

SETTING button
Press the SETTING button to show the Setup screen on the display. Turn the MENU knob to navigate the options and then press the OK button to make a selection.

Radio Audio
Clock

Menu Item
Ref. FM List
Sound Bass Treble Bal. Fade
AUX In Low Medium High
Speed Vol. Bass Boost Audio Reset
Set Time

ON/OFF Format Language

Refresh the FM station list.

Result

Adjust the volume to Low.

Adjusts the volume to Medium.

Adjusts the volume to High.

Adjusts the speed volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of the vehicle increases.

Turn ON or OFF

Select "Yes" or "No" to reset all current settings to the factory settings.

Selecting this item allows user to adjust various clock settings.

Use the MENU knob/OK button to adjust the hour, press the PUSH OK button again and use the MENU knob/PUSH OK button

to adjust minutes. Press the

button to return to the previous screen.

Use the MENU knob/PUSH OK button to turn the clock ON or OFF. Press the

button to return to the previous screen.

Use the MENU knob/PUSH OK button to switch the clock from a 12 hour display to a 24 hour display.

Select the desired language for the system from the available options.

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MEDIA button

Pressing the MEDIA button will change the mode between the radio, USB, AUX and BT AUDIO (Bluetooth® Streaming Audio).

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT button is pressed while connected media is being played, the song playing will be repeated until the RPT button is pressed again.

MIX button

When the MIX button is pressed while a connected media is playing, the play pattern will switch to a random order.

SEEK/TRACK buttons

Press the

SEEK button while a con-

nected media is playing to return to the

beginning of the current track. Press the

SEEK button several times to skip

backward several tracks.

Press the

TRACK button while a con-

nected media is playing to advance one

track. Press the

TRACK button several

times to skip forward several tracks. If the

last track on the connected media is

skipped, the first track is played.

DISP button
When the DISP button is pressed while USB, iPod® or BT AUDIO is connected and playing a song, information about that song will be shown on the screen.

FM/AM radio operation

RADIO button

Press the RADIO button to change the band as follows:

AM FM1 FM2

If another audio source is playing when the RADIO button is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing.

MENU knob tuning

Turn the MENU knob to the left or right for manual tuning.

SEEK tuning

Press the

TRACK button or

SEEK

button to tune from low to high or high to

low frequencies and to stop at the next

broadcasting station.

1 to 6 station memory operations Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (six for FM1 and six for FM2) and six stations can be set for the AM band.
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2 using the RADIO button.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual SEEK tuning. Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons (1 6) until a beep sound is heard.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

Additional buttons

(back) button

When the

(back) button is pressed, it

returns to the previous menu.

AZ button

When listening to music via USB or iPod®, pressing the A-Z button will launch a quick search function in music browser that will allow user to search for music alphabetically using the MENU control knob.

(brightness control) button

To change the display brightness, press the button. Pressing the button again will
change the display to the day or the night display.

Additional features

For additional information about the USB interface or iPod® player available with this system, see "USB (Universal Serial Bus) & iPod® connection port" (P. 4-55).
For additional information, see "Bluetooth® streaming audio (Type A)" (P. 4-62) about the Bluetooth® audio interface available with this system.

FM/AM RADIO (Type B) (if so equipped)
For additional information, see "Audio operation precautions" (P. 4-43).

1. Display screen

2. PUSH SOUND button / TUNE· SCROLL knob

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4963

BACK button

MENU button

5. AUDIO button

/ (SEEK/TRACK) buttons

7. VOL (volume) knob/PUSH button

(power)

Audio main operation

VOL (volume) knob / PUSH (power) button

Place the ignition switch in the ON position

and press the PUSH

(power) button

while the system is off to call up the mode

(radio, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod®)

that was playing immediately before the

system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the PUSH (power) button.

Turn the VOL (volume) knob to adjust the volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the audio volume changes as the driving speed changes.

MENU button

Press the

MENU button to show the

Menu screen. Touch the "Settings" key on

the display, then touch the "Sound" key.

Sound

Bass Treble Balance

Fade

Speed Sensitive Volume

Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.
Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to "OFF" to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.

Bass, treble, balance, fade and Speed Sensitive Volume can be adjusted by touching "-"/"+", "L"/"R", or "R"/"F" keys.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

AUDIO button
Press to display the audio screen. When this button is pressed while the audio screen is not displayed, the last audio source played will play.

5. Preset list To listen to a preset station, touch the corresponding station from the preset list. If displayed, touch the " <" or " >" keys to scroll the preset list.

AM/FM radio screen

LHA4708

1. "AM Menu" / "FM Menu" key Touch to display the radio menu screen.

2. "Direct Tune" (if so equipped) Touch to manually enter a station.

3. Audio source indicator Indicates the currently selected audio source.

4. Reception information display Reception information currently available such as frequency, station name, etc. is displayed.

AM radio operation

Press the

MENU button and touch the

"AM" key or press the AUDIO button and

select AM on the bottom of the Launch Bar

to bring up the AM display screen.

If another audio source is playing when the "AM" key is touched, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing.

AM Menu

Touch the "AM Menu" key to display the AM Menu screen options:
· SCAN: To scan the stations, touch the "AM Menu" key on the radio screen and then touch the "SCAN" key. The stations will be tuned from low to high frequencies and stop at each broadcasting station for several seconds. Touching the "SCAN" key again during this period of several seconds will stop tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station.

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

· Refresh: Touch the "Refresh" key to scan and update the station list displayed on the right side of the AM Menu screen.

(SEEK/TRACK) buttons

Press the

buttons to tune

from low to high or high to low frequencies

and to stop at the next broadcasting

station.

1 to 6 station memory operations

Up to six stations can be registered in the preset list.

1. Select the AM radio band.

2. Tune to the station you wish to store.

3. Touch and hold one of the preset numbers in the preset list.

The information such as frequency will be displayed on the preset list.

To select and listen to the preset stations,

push

on the steering wheel

briefly or touch a preferred station on the

preset list on the radio screen.

FM radio operation

Press the

MENU button and touch the

"FM Menu" key or press the AUDIO button

and select FM on the bottom of the Launch

Bar to bring up the FM display screen.

If another audio source is playing when the "FM" key is touched, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing.
The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on the screen during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception.
FM Menu
Touch the "FM Menu" key to display the FM Menu screen options:
· SCAN: To scan tune the stations, touch the "FM Menu" key on the radio screen and then touch the "SCAN" key. The stations will be tuned from low to high frequencies and stop at each broadcasting stations for several seconds. Touching the "SCAN" key again during this period of several seconds will stop tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station.
· Refresh: Touch the "Refresh" key to update the station list displayed on the right side of the FM Menu screen.
· RDS Info: Radio station and song information can be displayed on the FM display screen.

(SEEK/TRACK) buttons

Press the

buttons to tune

from low to high or high to low frequencies

and to stop at the next broadcasting

station.

1 to 12 station memory operations

Up to 12 stations can be registered in the preset list.

1. Select the FM radio band.

2. Tune to the station you wish to store.

3. Touch and hold one of the preset numbers in the preset list.

The information such as frequency will be displayed on the preset list.

To select and listen to the preset stations,

push

on the steering wheel

briefly or touch a preferred station on the

preset list on the radio screen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation
Connecting auxiliary devices
Connect an AUX device into the AUX input jack located on the center console below the heater and air conditioner controls.
The AUX input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette player, CD player, MP3 player or phone.
Insert a 1/8 in (3.5 mm) stereo mini plug in the audio input jack. If a cable with a mono plug is used, the audio output may not function normally.
Activation and playing
Turn on the AUX device. Connect an AUX cable to the AUX device and the AUX input jack. Select AUX mode from the audio source menu screen or by pressing the Source button on the steering wheel.

LHA4709
AUX screen · Audio source indicator
Indicates that the AUX source is currently playing.
· "Volume Setting" keys Touch one of the keys to select the sound output gain from Low, Medium and High.
· AUX from Launch Bar Touch to change from another source to AUX.

Additional features
For additional information about the USB interface or iPod® player available with this system, see "USB (Universal Serial Bus) & iPod® connection port" (P. 4-56).
For additional information, see "Bluetooth® streaming audio (Type B)" (P. 4-63) about the Bluetooth® audio interface available with this system.
Microsoft (WMA) Obligation of Labeling
Additional Obligation of Labeling
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary and third parties.

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4964
USB (Universal Serial Bus) CONNECTION PORT & iPod®* CONNECTION PORT (Type A) (if so equipped)
Connecting a device to the USB Connection Port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION
· To avoid damage and loss of function when using a USB device, note the following precautions.
· Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port.
· Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
· Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port.
For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer's owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device.
The USB port is located beneath the heater and air conditioner controls. Insert the USB device into the connection port.

When a compatible storage device is plugged into the connection port, compatible audio files on the storage device can be played through the vehicle's audio system.
Audio file operation
MEDIA button
Place the ignition switch in the ON position and press the MEDIA button to switch to the USB input mode. If another audio source is plugged in through the AUX IN jack located beneath the heater and air conditioner controls, the MEDIA button toggles between the two sources.
DISP button
Information about the audio files being played can be displayed on the display screen of the vehicle's audio system. Depending on how the audio files are encoded, information such as Folder, Song and Artist will be displayed.
The track number and number of total tracks in the folder are displayed on the screen as well.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

SEEK/TRACK (Reverse or Fast Forward) buttons

Press and hold the

SEEK/

TRACK buttons for 1.5 seconds while an au-

dio file on the USB device is playing to re-

verse or fast forward the track being

played. The track plays at an increased

speed while reversing or fast forwarding.

When the button is released, the audio file

returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/TRACK buttons

Press the

SEEK/TRACK button while

an audio file on the USB device or iPod® is

playing to return to the beginning of the

current track. Press the

SEEK/TRACK

button several times to skip backward sev-

eral tracks.

Press the

SEEK/TRACK button while

an audio file on the USB device or iPod® is

playing to advance one track. Press the

SEEK/TRACK button several times to

skip forward several tracks. If the last track

in a folder on the USB device or iPod® is

skipped, the first track of the next folder is

played.

MIX button

When the MIX button is pressed while a connected media is playing, all the tracks in the selected folder will be played in a random order.

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT button is pressed while connected media is being played, the song playing will be repeated until the RPT button is pressed again.

MENU knob

If there are multiple folders with audio files on the USB device, turn the MENU knob in the folder screen to change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audio files on the USB device, turning the MENU knob in either direction will return to the first track on the USB device.

(back) button

When the

(back) button is pressed, it

returns to the previous menu.

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4964
USB (Universal Serial Bus) CONNECTION PORT & iPod®* CONNECTION PORT (Type B) (if so equipped)
Connecting a device to the USB connection port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION
· To avoid damage and loss of function when using a USB device, note the following precautions.
· Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port.
· Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
· Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port.
For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer's owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device.
The USB port is located on the center console beneath the heater and air conditioner controls. Insert the USB device into the connection port.

When a compatible storage device is plugged into the connection port, compatible audio files on the storage device can be played through the vehicle's audio system.

LHA4711

USB connections screen

Press the

MENU button and touch the

"Connections" key or press the "Settings"

key and touch the "Connections" key to

change USB settings.

· Auto Change Source Touch "ON" or "OFF" to change the audio source settings for USB memory devices or an iPod® connected through a USB cable.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

USB screen

LHA4710

1. "USB Menu" key Touch to switch to the USB Menu screen.

2. Track information Track information such as the song name, artist name and album name are displayed.

3. Audio source indicator Indicates the currently selected audio source.

4. USB operation keys Touch to control USB playback functions

5. Play time and progress bar The play time of the track is displayed. The bar indicates the progress in playing a track.
USB operation keys
Touch to control USB playback functions.

Keys

Description

Each time "

" key is

touched, the repeat mode

changes.

Touch to return to the beginning of the current track. Touch again to select the previous track. Touch and hold to rewind the current track.

Touch to play the track.

Touch to pause the track.

Touch to select the next track. Touch and hold to fast-forward the track.

Each time "

" key is

touched, the random mode

changes.

USB memory device player operation

Activation and playing

Connecting the USB memory device into the port will start playing the USB memory.

USB memory device can also be played by touching the "USB" key on the Menu screen or by touching USB on the Launch Bar.

To pause playing the USB memory device

touch the "

" key. To resume playing,

touch the " " key.

Skipping tracks

To skip the tracks, press the

buttons on the control panel or touch the "

" or " " keys on the screen repeat-

edly until the preferred track is selected.

NOTE:

Depending on the condition, skipping to the previous track may require pressing the button or touching the key twice. Pressing the button or touching the key once may only restart the current track from the beginning.

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Fast-forwarding/rewinding

To rewind or fast-forward the track, press

and hold the

buttons on the

control panel or touch and hold the " "

or " " keys on the screen.

Changing play mode

Repeat mode

Touch the "

" key on the USB screen to

change the repeat mode.

The following modes are available:

All: Repeat all

1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder

1 Track: Repeat track

Random mode

Touch the "

" key on the screen to

change the random mode as follows:

No text displayed: Random off

All: Repeat all

1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder

USB menu
Touch the "USB Menu" key on the USB screen to display the USB Menu screen.

"Now Playing" key Touch to display the USB screen.

"Folder List" key

Touch to display the folder list. Touch an item on the list to select the folder. The subfolder or track list will be displayed. Select a sub-folder or track from the list.

"Album Artwork" Touch to run on/off the album artwork display on the USB screen.

Connecting iPod®

CAUTION
· Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port.
· Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
· Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port.

WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.

For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer's owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the iPod® can be controlled with the audio system controls and display screen, use the USB connection port located on the center console below the heater and air conditioner controls. Connect the iPod®specific end of the cable to the iPod® and the USB end of the cable to the USB connection port on the vehicle. If your iPod® supports charging via a USB connection, its

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

battery will be charged while connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, remove the USB end of the cable from the USB connection port on the vehicle, then remove the cable from the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are compatible: · iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware
version 1.3.0 or later) · iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware
version 2.0.1 or later) · iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware
version 2.0.4 or later) · iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware
version 4.2.1 or later)* · iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware
version 5.1 or later) · iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware
version 5.1 or later)

· iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware version 1.3.1 or later)
· iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later)
· iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later)
· iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware version 1.0.4 or later)
· iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware version 1.0.2 or later)
· iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware version 1.1 or later)
· iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later) · iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later) · iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later) · iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
* Some features of this iPod® may not be fully functional.
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to the version indicated above.

LHA4724
iPod screen
1. "iPod Menu" key Touch to switch to the iPod Menu screen.
2. Track information Track information such as the song name, artist name and album name are displayed.
3. Audio source indicator Indicates the currently selected audio source.

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4. Album artwork An image of the album artwork is displayed when available if the setting is turned on.
5. iPod® operation keys Touch to control iPod® playback functions
6. Play time and progress bar The play time of the track is displayed. The bar indicates the progress in playing a track.

iPod® operation keys Touch to control iPod® playback functions.

Keys

Description

Each time "

" key is

touched, the repeat mode

changes.

Touch to return to the beginning of the current track. Touch again to select the previous track. Touch and hold to rewind the current track.

Touch to play the track.

Touch to pause the track.

Touch to select the next track. Touch and hold to fast-forward the track.

Each time "

" key is

touched, the random mode

changes.

iPod® memory device player operation

Activation and playing

Connecting the iPod® to the vehicle via USB cable will activate the iPod® mode.

The iPod® can also be played by touching the "iPod" key on the Menu screen or by touching iPod on the Launch Bar.

Skipping tracks

To skip the tracks, press the

buttons on the control panel or touch the "

" or " " keys on the screen repeat-

edly until the preferred track is selected.

NOTE:

Fast-forwarding/rewinding

To rewind or fast-forward the track, press

and hold the

buttons on the

control panel or touch and hold the " "

or " " keys on the screen,

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

Changing play mode

Repeat mode

Touch the "

" key on the iPod® screen

to change the repeat mode. The following

modes are available.

No text displayed: Repeat off

All: Repeat all

One: Repeat track

Random mode

Touch the "

" key on the screen to

change the random mode as follows.

No text displayed: Random off

Songs: Random play

iPod® Menu
Touch the "iPod Menu" key on the iPod® screen to display the iPod® Menu screen.

"Now Playing" key Touch to display the USB screen.

"Folder List" key (if Touch to display the folder list.

so equipped)

Touch an item on the list to

select the folder. The sub-

folder or track list will be dis-

played. Select a sub-folder or

track from the list.

"Album Artwork" Touch to run on/off the album

key

artwork display on the USB

screen.

"Playlists" key "Artists" key

Touch to display the list according to the selected item.

"Albums" key

"Songs" key

"Podcasts" key

"Genres" key

"Composers" key

"Audiobooks" key

"iTunes Radio" key

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO (Type A) (if so equipped)
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio device that is capable of playing audio files, the device can be connected to the vehicle's audio system so that the audio files on the device play through the vehicle's speakers. For additional information, see "FM/AM radio (Type A)" (P. 4-47).
NOTE:
For additional information regarding Bluetooth® Streaming Audio, refer to the cellular phone owner's manual.

Connecting Bluetooth® audio

To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the vehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the

button on the audio unit

and then select "Pair device" with MENU

knob/OK button.

2. Enter the PIN number on the screen into the device to be connected.

3. If the pairing is successful, the device name will come up on the screen.

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:
Some phones may not require a PIN number in order to connect.
Audio main operation
To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, press the MEDIA button on the audio unit repeatedly until the BT AUDIO is displayed on the screen.
NOTE:
When a Bluetooth® audio device is connected to the system, audio function can only be controlled through the device.
BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO (Type B) (if so equipped)
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio device that is capable of playing audio files, the device can be connected to the vehicle's audio system so that the audio files on the device play through the vehicle's speakers. For additional information, see "FM/AM radio (Type B)" (P. 4-50).
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to the cellular phone owner's manual.

Connecting procedure

LHA4726

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be canceled.

To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:

Manual Connecting Procedure

1. Press the trol panel.

MENU button on the con-

2. Touch the "Connections" key on the screen.

3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the "Add New" key to connect a phone.

4. When a compatible phone is found a message with a PIN appears on the screen.

5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept the connection.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

Menu Item Bluetooth
ON Favorite (Connection first) PIN

Result Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device. Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the "ON" key again. The indicator light will go off. Allows user to toggle "Phone" and "Audio" favorite settings on and off. Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.

Automatic Connecting Procedure

If no phone is connected to the system,

press and hold the

button on the

steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds.

After the prompt, speak "Add Phone", the

system will announce "transferring to the

add phone settings menu". The system will

start the pairing procedure. When a com-

patible phone is found, a message with a

PIN appears on the screen. Operate the

Bluetooth® phone to complete the con-

nection process. For additional informa-

tion, see "Bluetooth® connections screen"

(P. 4-85).

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4727
Bluetooth® screen
1. "BT Menu" key Depending on the Bluetooth® version supported by the connected device, either the "BT Menu" key or "Connections" key is displayed.
2. Track information Track information such as the song name, artist name and album name are displayed.
3. Audio source indicator Indicates the currently selected audio source.

4. Bluetooth® audio operation keys Touch to control Bluetooth® audio playback functions
5. Play time and progress bar The play time of the track is displayed. The bar indicates the progress in playing a track.

Bluetooth® operation keys
Touch to control Bluetooth® playback functions.

Keys

Description

Each time "

" key is

touched, the repeat mode

changes.

Touch to return to the beginning of the current track. Touch again to select the previous track. Touch and hold to rewind the current track.

Touch to play the track.

Touch to pause the track.

Touch to select the next track. Touch and hold to fast-forward the track.

Each time "

" key is

touched, the random mode

changes.

Bluetooth® audio operation
The ability to pause, change tracks, fast forward, rewind, randomize and repeat music may be different between devices. Some or all of these functions may not be supported on each device.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

NOTE:

Depending on the Bluetooth® audio device that is connected, it may not be possible to perform audio operations or a delay may occur before music is played back.

Activation and playing
A Bluetooth® audio device can be played by touching the "Bluetooth" key on the Menu screen or by touching Bluetooth on the Launch Bar.

To pause playing the Bluetooth® audio,

touch the "

" key. Touch the "

" key

to resume playing.

Changing folders

To change folders, touch the "BT Menu" key.

Fast-forwarding/rewinding

To fast-forward or rewind the track, press

and hold the

buttons on the

control panel or touch the " " or " "

keys on the screen.

Changing play mode Repeat mode

Touch the "

" key on the screen to

change the repeat mode.

Random mode

Touch the "

" key on the screen to

change the random mode.

NOTE:

Available repeat/random modes change depending on the connected device.

BT Menu
Touch the "BT Menu" key on the Bluetooth® audio screen to display the Bluetooth® audio menu screen.
The following items are available.

"Now Playing" key "Connections" key "Folder List" key*

Touch to display the Bluetooth® audio screen.
Touch to display the connections screen.
Touch to display the folder list. Touch an item on the list to select the folder.

*: displayed only when available.

NOTE:

Depending on the connected device, the "BT Menu" key may not be displayed.

LHA4122

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL

1. button

Menu control switch/ OK

(back) switch

(SEEK/TRACK) buttons

4. Volume control switch

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Volume control switch
Push the volume control switch up or down to increase or decrease the volume.
Menu control switch/OK button
In the vehicle information display, navigate to "Audio". Use the OK button to change the mode in the following sequence: AM FM USB/iPod®* Bluetooth® Audio* AUX* AM. * These modes are only available when compatible media storage is inserted into the device or connected to the system.
SEEK/TRACK buttons

For most audio sources, pushing the tuning switches for more than 1.5 seconds provides a different function than pushing for less than 1.5 seconds.

AM and FM:

· Press the

buttons for less

than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease

the preset station.

· Press the

buttons for more

than 1.5 seconds to seek up or down to

the next station.

iPod®:

· Press the

buttons for less

than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease

the track number.

USB:

· Press the

buttons for less

than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease

the track number.

· Press the

buttons for more

than 1.5 seconds to reverse or fast for-

ward the current song.

Bluetooth® Audio:

· Press the

buttons for less

than 1.5 seconds to skip ahead or back to

the next song.

· Press the

buttons for more

than 1.5 seconds to reverse or fast for-

ward the current song.

ANTENNA
The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window.
CAUTION
· Do not place metalized film near the rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise.
· When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna. Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth.

(back) switch

Push the (back) switch to return to the previous screen or cancel the current selection.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

USB/iPod® CHARGING PORT (if so equipped)

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts.

LHA5413
There is a USB/iPod® charging port located on the rear center console. This port will charge compatible devices.
NOTE:
Only the USB connection port located below the instrument panel will allow operation of the USB/iPod® devices through the audio system.

WARNING
· A cellular phone should not be used for any purpose while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular phones while driving.
· If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands-free cellular phone operational mode is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
· If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION
· Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control modules.
· Keep the antenna wire more than 20 cm (8 in) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.
· Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer.
· Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body.
· For additional information, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped)
WARNING
· Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
· If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine.

LHA5354

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

LHA4279
REGULATORY INFORMATION
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEM
The system allows hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Phone System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some operations may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the system is initialized, which

takes a few seconds. If the

button on

the control panel or the

button on the

steering wheel is pressed before the initial-

ization completes, the system may not re-

spond. Wait a few seconds and press the

button on the control panel or the

button on the steering wheel again.

Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the system, observe the following:
· Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Keep vents pointed away from the microphone and close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.).

LHA5355
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel and control panel.

Steering Wheel:

PHONE/SEND

Press the

button to initiate a

hands-free phone session or an-

swer an incoming call.

PHONE/END

Press the

button to end

phone call.

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Control Panel Buttons:

LHA5356

(phone send) button

2. MENU knob/ OK button

3. SETTING button

GETTING STARTED
The following procedures will help you get started using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Connecting a Device
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be canceled.
1. Press the phone button on the control panel. Pair device appears on the display. Press the OK button.
2. Enter the PIN number on the screen into the device to be connected. Confirm password on the display.
3. If the device is paired correctly, "Connected" will appear on the display followed by the paired phone-name.
NOTE: · Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular
phones may not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone module. · Some phones may not require a PIN number in order to connect. · This command can also be accessed by pressing the button on the control panel if no devices are currently paired.

· Upon turning the vehicle power on, the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System will automatically search for previously connected devices in range if the Bluetooth® system is on.

Phonebook
The phone's phonebook will be automatically downloaded as part of the pairing process. If the download is successful, the screen will read "Phonebook Downloaded" shortly after the device's name is displayed.
NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A's phonebook if you are currently connected with Phone B.

Disconnect Bluetooth® Device

To disconnect a device from the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System,

press the

button on the control panel.

Use the MENU knob to select "Delete De-

vice". Select the device you wish to discon-

nect. When the device has been success-

fully disconnected, "Disconnect" will be

displayed on the screen and the

Bluetooth® symbol will disappear.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

DIALING A NUMBER
To dial a phone number using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, use one of the following procedures.

Manual Dial

To manually dial a phone number when using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, use the following procedure.

1. With a compatible Bluetooth® hands-

free device connected to the system,

press the

button on the control

panel or

button on the steering

wheel. For additional information, see

"Connecting a device" (P. 4-71).

2. Using the MENU knob, select "Dial Number" and press the OK button.

3. Numbers will appear on the display

screen. Using the MENU knob, select the

desired numbers, pressing the OK but-

ton after each number. Once all

numbers/characters have been en-

tered, select the

icon in the Dial

Number screen or

button on the

steering wheel to initiate the call.

MAKING A CALL
To make a call, use the following procedure.

1. With a compatible Bluetooth® hands-

free device connected to the system,

press the

button on the control

panel. For additional information, see

"Connecting a Device" (P. 4-71).

2. Select one of the following options to make a call:

· "Call History": Select the contact/number

from the dialed, received, or missed calls

list. Press either the OK or

button on

the control panel to initiate the call.

· "Phonebook": Select the contact/number

from the vehicle phonebook. Press either

OK or

button on the control panel to

initiate the call. For additional informa-

tion, see "Phonebook" (P. 4-71).

· "Dial Number": Select to manually dial phone number. For additional information, see "Dialing a Number" (P. 4-72).

RECEIVING A CALL
When an incoming call is detected, the system will display the incoming caller's name. If the incoming caller is not a contact in the phonebook, only the contact number will be displayed.

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

To answer an incoming call, press the

button on the control panel, the

the steering wheel, or select

in the

display screen.

To reject an incoming call, press the button on the steering wheel, or select in the display screen.

DURING A CALL

During a call, the user may end the phone

call by pressing the

button on the

steering wheel, or selecting in the dis-

play screen.

The user may also transfer the call from the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System to

the phone's handset by selecting

the display and pressing OK. A vehicle icon

appears on the display when the call is

transferred. Press the OK button to transfer

back to Bluetooth®

ENDING A CALL

The user may end a hands-free phone call

by pressing the

button on the steer-

ing wheel or selecting

in the display

screen.

VOLUME CONTROL
Turning the VOL (volume) control knob in BTmode will control the phone call volume.

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM (Type B) (if so equipped)
WARNING
· Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
· If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine.

LHA4953

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

LHA5049
REGULATORY INFORMATION
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Marca: PANASONIC Modelo: AN1701 IFT: RCPPAAN170709 NOM-208-SCFI-2016

BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Panasonic.
USING THE SYSTEM
The system allows hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which takes a few seconds. If the button is pressed before the initialization completes, the system will announce "There is no phone connected" and will not react to voice commands.

Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Voice Recognition System, observe the following:
· Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Keep all vents pointed away from the microphone and close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly.
· Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command. Otherwise, the command will not be received properly.
· Start speaking a command within 5 seconds after the tone sounds.
· Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.
· For calling contacts by name, please say both the first and last name of the contact for better recognition.

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,

press the

button located on the steer-

ing wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. After

the tone sounds, speak a command.

The command given is picked up by the microphone, and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted.
· If a command is not recognized, the system announces, "Please say or select a command from the displayed list." Make sure the command is said exactly as prompted by the system and repeat the command in a clear voice.

· If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say "Go back" or "Correction" any time the system is waiting for

a response.

· You can cancel a command when the system is waiting for a response by say-

ing, "Cancel" or "Quit." The system an-

nounces "Exit" and ends the Voice Recognition session. You can also press and

hold the

button on the steering

wheel for 1.5 seconds at any time to end the Voice Recognition session. Whenever

the Voice Recognition session is can-

celed, a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system.

· If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback, push the (+ or -) volume control switches on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback. You can also use the radio volume control knob.

Voice Prompt Interrupt

In most cases you can interrupt the voice

feedback to speak the next command by

pressing the

button on the steering

wheel. After interrupting the system, wait

for a beep before speaking your command.

LHA4723
INDICATORS
When a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, indica-
tors O1 for the phone and text messaging
are displayed on the top of the screen.

Indicator

Description
Indicates there are unread received messages.
Indicates the Bluetooth® device that is currently connected.
Indicates the strength of the signal the Bluetooth® device is receiving.
Indicates the amount of remaining Bluetooth® device battery.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

You can use the

button to

interrupt the system feedback

and give a command at once.

PHONE BUTTON

To answer an incoming call or to

end a call press the

button.

To reject a call press and hold the button.

LHA4954
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel.

VOICE COMMAND BUTTON

Press and hold the

button

for more than 1.5 seconds to initi-

ate the Voice Recognition session.

To exit the Voice Recognition ses-

sion press and hold the

but-

ton for more than 1.5 seconds. For

additional information, see "Voice

prompt interrupt" (P. 4-75).

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4726
BLUETOOTH® CONNECTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be canceled.

To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:
Bluetooth® Connecting Procedure
1. Select the "Settings" key on the Launch Bar.

2. Touch the "Connections" key.
3. Touch the Bluetooth tab and touch the "Add New" key.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen.

If a PIN appears on the screen, operate the Bluetooth® device to enter/confirm the PIN.

Menu Item Bluetooth
ON Favorite (Connection first) PIN

NOTE:
Some cellular phones may require you to accept certain permissions in order to enable features on your Bluetooth® system. During the Bluetooth® pairing process, please check your cellular phone's display for a pop-up with the request to grant phonebook access. Granting phonebook access permission will allow your contacts to be downloaded to the vehicle's Bluetooth® system. A pop-up may display on your cellular phone stating that the Bluetooth® system would like to access your contacts and call history. Please select "Allow" or Yes" to grant this permission.

Automatic Connecting Procedure

If no phone is connected to the system,

press and hold the

button on the

steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.

After the prompt, speak "Add Phone", the

system will announce "transferring to the

add phone settings menu". The system will

start the pairing procedure. When a com-

patible phone is found, a message with a

PIN appears on the screen. Operate the

Bluetooth® phone to complete the con-

nection process. For additional informa-

tion, see "Bluetooth® connections screen"

(P. 4-85).

VOICE COMMANDS

Voice commands can be used to operate

the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Press and hold the

button for less

than 1.5 seconds to bring up the phone

command menu. The commands avail-

able are:

· Call <name>

· Dial <number>

· Recent Calls

· Read/Send Text (if so equipped)

· Siri® (if so equipped)

· Voice Assistant (if so equipped)

· Phonebook

· Quick Dial

· Redial

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

· Select Phone · Add Phone · Call <name> Mobile · Call <name> Home · Call <name> Office · Call <name> Main · Call <name> Other · Settings
"Call <name>"
Speak this command to make a call to a contact that is stored in the phonebook. Say "Call" followed by a phonebook name to initiate a call. If the system does not recognize the name it will display a list of similar names. After the prompt, speak or touch an item number from the displayed list to place the call.
"Dial <number>"
Speak this command to make a call with a spoken phone number. After the prompt, say "Dial" followed by a 7 to 10 digit phone number. The system will repeat the number back. Say "Dial" to initiate the call or "Correction" to re-enter the phone number.

"Recent Calls"
The following commands are available under "Recent Calls":
· Incoming Calls Speak this command to list the last 20 incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is from an entry in the phonebook, the name will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of the incoming call will be displayed. When prompted, speak or touch the item number on the screen to place the call. Touch the "Next" key to move through the list of incoming calls.
· Outgoing Calls Speak this command to list the last 20 outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the call was to an entry in the phonebook, the name will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of the outgoing call will be displayed. When prompted, speak or touch the item number on the screen to place the call. Touch the "Next" key to move through the list of outgoing calls.

· Missed Calls Speak this command to list the last 20 missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is from an entry in the phonebook, the name will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of the missed call will be displayed. When prompted, speak or touch the item number on the screen to place the call. Touch the "Next" key to move through the list of missed calls.
"Read Text/Send Text" (if so equipped)
Speak this command to access text messaging functions. For additional information, see "Text messaging" (P. 4-81).
"Phonebook through voice command"
Speak "Phonebook" to view a list of quick steps to access entries stored in the phonebook. Commands are organized by the phone number type selected in the cellular device. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone's owner's manual.

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The following commands are available: · <Say a Contact Name> · <Say a Contact Name> Main · <Say a Contact Name> Home · <Say a Contact Name> Mobile · <Say a Contact Name> Office · <Say a Contact Name> Other
For additional information on manually selecting phonebook entries, see "Making a call" (P. 4-80).
"Quick dial"
Speak this command to access the Quick dial menu. After the prompt, speak or select an item number on the displayed list to place the call. For additional information, see "Making a call" (P. 4-80).
"Redial"
Speak this command to call the last number dialed. After the prompt, say "Redial" to dial the number of the last outgoing call. The system will display "Redialing <name/ number>". The name of the phonebook entry will be displayed if it is available, otherwise the number being redialed will be displayed.

"Select Phone"
Speak this command to access the Connections menu. For additional information, see "Bluetooth® connections screen" (P. 4-85).
"Add Phone"
Speak this command to access the Connections menu. For additional information, see "Bluetooth® connections screen" (P. 4-85).
"Settings"
Speak this command to access the System Voice settings menu. The system will exit Voice Recognition mode. Touch one of the following options on the screen to change the settings. · Beep Only for Opening Prompt
By touching the "ON" key, the indicator light will illuminate, the system voice will turn off and only a tone will sound when the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System is activated. To turn the system voice back on, touch the "ON" key again, the indicator light will turn off.

· Best Match List When the system doesn't recognize a phonebook name or dial number, it will provide a list of similar sounding results. To turn this off, touch the "ON" key, the indicator light will turn off. To turn on, touch the "ON" key again, the indicator light will turn on.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79

LHA4705

PHONE DISPLAY SCREEN

The Phone screen can be displayed by

pressing the

button on the control

panel.

The following options are displayed:
· Quick Dial Displays the Quick Dial screen. For additional information, see "Quick dial" (P. 4-79)
· Phonebook Displays the Phonebook screen. For additional information, see "Making a call" (P. 4-80).

· Call History Displays the Call History screen. For additional information, see "Making a call" (P. 4-80).
· Dial Number Displays the Dial Number screen. For additional information, see "Making a call" (P. 4-80).
· Text Message Displays the received message screen. For additional information, see "Text messaging" (P. 4-81).
· Connections Displays the Connections screen. For additional information, see "Bluetooth® connections screen" (P. 4-85).
· Volume Displays the volume adjustment screen. For additional information, see "Volume & beeps" (P. 4-88).

MAKING A CALL

1. Press the

button on the Launch Bar.

The "Phone" screen will appear on the

display.

2. Select one of the options to make a call.

Phonebook

To access the phonebook:

1. Press the

button on the steering

wheel or touch the " " key on the

launch bar.

2. Touch the "Phonebook" key.

3. Choose the desired entry from the displayed list.

Call History

1. Select a phonebook name or phone number from the recent incoming, outgoing, or missed calls tabs.

2. Touch a phonebook name or phone number listed to initiate the call.

Dial Number

1. Enter the phone number manually using the keypad displayed on the screen.

2. Touch the "OK" key on the screen to initiate the call.

For additional options to make a call, see "Voice commands" (P. 4-77).

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

RECEIVING/ENDING A CALL
When a call is received by the phone connected to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System, the call information is displayed on the control panel display.

To accept the incoming call, either:

· Press the wheel, or

button on the steering

· Touch the " screen.

Answer" key on the

To end or reject an incoming call, either:

· Press and hold the steering wheel, or

button on the

· Touch the " screen.

Decline" key on the

If the user is not able to answer the call right away, touch the "Hold Call" key displayed on the screen. A message will be played for the caller: "I'm not able to take a call right now." The user may then accept the call when available or reject the call.

DURING A CALL
While a call is active the following options will appear on the control panel display:
· Mute Touch this key to mute or unmute the system.

· Dial Number Touch this key to dial digits during the phone call.
· Switch to Handset Touch the "Use Handset" key on the screen to transfer the call to the handset (cellular phone). To transfer the call back from the handset to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, press the button on the control panel then select the "Transfer Hands-free" key on the screen.

NOTE:

Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular telephones while driving.

· Switch Call This option will only be available when a second call is active.

If supported by the phone, the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

allows for call waiting functionality. If a

call is received while another call is al-

ready active, a message will be displayed

on the screen. Press the

button on

the steering wheel or touch the "

Answer" key on screen to accept the in-

coming call. Touch the "

Decline" key

on the screen to reject the second call.

While a call is active, press the

button

on the steering wheel to access additional

options. Speak one of the following

commands:

· "Send Digits" Speak this command followed by the digits to enter digits during the phone call.

· "Switch call" Speak this command to hold the second call and switch back to the original call.

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)

WARNING
· Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of "Text-to-Speech". Check local regulations before using this feature.
· Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of some of the applications and features, such as social networking and texting. Check local regulations for any requirements.
· Use the text messaging feature after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use the feature while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

· If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while using the text messaging feature, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
NOTE:
This feature is automatically disabled if the connected device does not support the Message Access Profile (MAP). For additional information, refer to the phone's owner's manual for details and instructions.
NOTE:
Many phones may require special permission to enable text messaging. Check the phone's screen during Bluetooth® pairing. For some phones, you may need to enable `Notifications' in the phone's Bluetooth® menu for text messages to appear on the headunit. For additional information, refer to your phone's owner's manual. Text message integration requires that the phone support MAP (Message Access Profile) for both receiving and sending text messages. Some phones may not support all text messaging features.

The system allows for the sending and receiving of text messages through the vehicle interface.
The availability of the text message function may vary depending on the cellular phone.
When the cellular phone connected to the vehicle receives a text message, a notification will appear on the control panel display. To check the message, touch the "Read" key. Touch the "Ignore" key to save the message to be checked later.
Access text messaging through the vehicles Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone or through the vehicles control panel.
For additional information, it is recommended that you contact a NISSAN dealer or visit a NISSAN owners portal for details regarding phone compatibility.

Text messaging using Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (if so equipped)

Sending a text message (if so equipped)

1. Press and hold the

button on the

steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.

2. Say "Send Text" after the tone.

3. The system will provide a list of available commands in order to determine the recipient of the text message. Choose from the following: · Phonebook · Quick Dial · Incoming Calls · Outgoing Calls · Missed Calls · Dial
4. Once a recipient is chosen, the system prompts for which message to send. Nine predefined messages are available as well as three custom messages. To choose one of the predefined messages, speak one of the following after the tone: · "Driving, can't text" · "Call me" · "On my way" · "Running late" · "Okay" · "Yes" · "No" · "Where are you?" · "When?"

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

To send one of the custom messages, say "Custom Messages". If more than one custom message is stored, the system will prompt for the number of the desired custom message. For additional information on setting and managing custom text messages, see "Phone and text message settings" (P. 4-86).

Reading a received text message

1. Press and hold the

button on the

steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.

2. Say "Read Text" after the tone.

The display will show a list of 20 messages with the sender and delivery time. Touch the "Next" key on the screen to view all messages. To view a text message press the
button on the steering wheel and speak the number item list on the screen. The following options will be available:
· Play Speak this command to have the system say the message.
· Reply Speak this command to send a text message response to the sender of the text message.
· Call Speak this command to call the sender.

· Previous Speak this command to move to the previous text message (if available).
· Next Speak this command to move to the next text message (if available).
NOTE:
Text messages are only displayed if the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Text messaging using the control panel (if so equipped)

Display received message list

1. Press the

button on the control panel.

2. Touch the "Text Message" key on the screen

3. Touch an item on the list to read or reply to the message.

Available actions:
· Prev. Touch this key to read the previous message.
· Next Touch this key to read the next message.
· Play/Stop Touch the "Play" key to have the handsfree phone system read out the received message. Touch the "Stop" key to stop reading.
· Call If the sender of the message is registered in the phonebook, touch the "Call" key to make a call to the sender.
· Reply A reply message can be selected from the predefined list or by a custom message.
Sending a text message (if so equipped)

Up to 100 messages can be stored in the This function may not be supported de-

message list.

pending on the cellular phone.

Received message screen
Touching the "Read" key on the incoming message notification screen or selecting a message from the message list will show the details of the received message on the display.

1. Press the panel.

button on the control

2. Touch the "Text Message" key on the screen.

3. Touch the "Create Message" key on the screen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

The following items are available:

Available item To
Select Text

Enter Number by Keypad Quick Dial Phonebook Call History Fixed Customized

Send

Action Enter the phone number of the recipient using the keypad. Touch the "OK" key to confirm. Select a recipient from the quick dial list. Select a recipient from the phonebook. Select a recipient/phone number from call history. Touch to display a list of predefined text messages. Touch to display a list of custom text messages. Custom text can be created or edited from the setting menu. For additional information, see "Phone and text message settings" (P. 4-86). Touch to send the message.

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4716
BLUETOOTH® CONNECTIONS SCREEN
1. " " (back) key 2. Bluetooth tab 3. Connections screen 4. "Add New" key 5. " " (settings) key 6. " " (info) key 7. " " (Bluetooth® Audio connection) key 8. " " (Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System connection) key Access the Connections screen to change settings and view Bluetooth® information. To access the Connections screen press the MENU button on the control panel.

Touch the "Connections" key on the screen then select the Bluetooth tab. The paired phone will be added to the list on the Bluetooth® connections screen. Touching the name of another device on the list will switch the connected device.
" " (back) key

Touch the "

" key to go back to the

previous screen.

Connecting Bluetooth®
For additional information on connecting a cellular phone or device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, see "Bluetooth® connecting procedure" (P. 4-76).
NOTE:
Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.

Bluetooth tab
This tab will display up to six Bluetooth® devices. If six devices are already connected, one of the devices must be deleted before another device can be connected.
"Add New" key
Touch the key on the screen to connect a new Bluetooth® device. For additional information, see "Bluetooth® connecting procedure" (P. 4-76).
" " (Bluetooth® settings) key

Touch the "

" key on the screen to

display a list of options.

· Bluetooth

Touch this key to turn the Bluetooth®

connection on or off

· Favorite (Connection first) Touch this key to change which device

will be connected first when multiple devices are connected to the vehicle. Turn the " " key on or off to make the

device a favorite connection. Turn the " " key on or off to make the device a favorite connection.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

· Pin Touch this key to customize the PIN code. Input a four digit number then touch the "OK" key. The new PIN will be set.
" " (info) key

Touch the "

" key on the screen to

display the information of the cellular

phone or to delete the device.

Touch the "Delete" key to remove a paired device then select "Yes" when a message appears.

" " (Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System connection) key

A list of connected devices will be displayed

on the screen. Touch the " " key next to

the name to connect a device to the

Hands-Free Phone System. If the phone is

listed as a favorite, a star will appear on the

icon. Touch the key again to disconnect the

device. The device will not be removed

from the list. For additional information on

removing a device, see "

(info) key"

(P. 4-86).

" " (Bluetooth® Audio connection) key

A list of connected devices will be displayed

on the screen. Touch the " " key next to

the name to connect a device to

Bluetooth® Audio. If the device is listed as a

favorite, a star will appear on the icon.

Touch the key again to disconnect the de-

vice. The device will not be removed from

the list. For additional information on re-

moving a device, see "

(info) key"

(P. 4-86).

LHA4721
PHONE AND TEXT MESSAGE SETTINGS
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System settings can be changed according to the user's preference. To access the "Phone" settings menu press the MENU button on the control panel. Touch the "Settings" key then select the "Phone" key.

4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The following options are available:

Quick Dial Phonebook Text Message
Notifications Automatic Hold

Menu Item Edit Delete All Download Entire Phonebook Auto Downloaded Text Message Text Message Ringtone Signature Auto Reply Auto Reply Text Message Driver Only Vehicle Ringtone

Result Entries in the Quick Dial can be edited. For additional information, see "Quick dial" (P. 4-79). Deletes all of the stored phone numbers in quick dial. All the phone numbers that are stored in a phonebook in the cellular phone that is connected to the vehicle are downloaded at once. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone's owner's manual. Turns on/off automatic downloading of the phonebook when a new phone is connected. Turns the text messaging function on/off. Turn the incoming message sound on/off. Turns the signature setting for the outgoing text message on/off. Turns the automatic text message reply function on/off. Select the text message to be used for the automatic reply. Choose from a list of predefined messages. When this item is turned on, incoming call notification is displayed only on the handset. Turns the vehicle ringtone on/off. When this item turns on, an incoming call will be put on hold automatically.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87

iPod®/IPHONE®

VOLUME & BEEPS

There are several methods to customize the volume settings.

Volume & Beeps

The Volume & Beeps screen can be found

by pressing the

MENU button on the

control panel, touching the "Settings" key

on the screen and selecting "Volume &

Beeps". To adjust the volume of the follow-

ing options, touch the "" and "+" keys on the

screen.

The available settings are:
· Ringtone Adjust the volume level of the ringtone of incoming calls.
· Outgoing Call Adjust the volume level of the outgoing calls.
· Voice Prompt Vol. Adjust the volume level of the system voice.

· Text-to-speech Vol. Adjust the volume of the replay voice for text messaging.
· Button Beeps Turns on/off the button beep sounds and alarm for prohibited operations.

Volume Settings

The Volume settings screen can be found

by pressing the

button on the control

panel then touching the "Volume" key on

the screen. To adjust the volume of the

following options, touch the "" and "+" keys

on the screen.

The available settings are:
· Ringtone Adjust the volume level of the ringtone of incoming calls.
· Outgoing Call Adjust the volume level of the outgoing calls.

"Made for iPod", "Made for iPhone" and "Made for iPad" mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone or iPad may affect wireless performance.
iPad, iPhone, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffle and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.

4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11 Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . 5-12 Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-14
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Manual Transmission (M/T) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
ECO mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

LDW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 How to enable/disable the LDW system . . . . . 5-26 LDW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Intelligent Lane Intervention (if so equipped) . . . . 5-30 Intelligent Lane Intervention system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 How to enable/disable the Intelligent Lane Intervention system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 Intelligent Lane Intervention system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-38 BSW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . . . 5-41 BSW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 BSW driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . . 5-49 RCTA system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

How to enable/disable the RCTA system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52 RCTA system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58 Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58 Cruise control operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped) . . 5-60 How to select the cruise control mode . . . . . . 5-62 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65 Vehicle--to--vehicle distance control mode limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) (if so equipped) . .5-84 RAB system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85 Turning the RAB system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87

RAB system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-88 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
Intelligent Emergency Braking (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
Intelligent Emergency Braking system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92 Turning the Intelligent Emergency Braking system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94 Intelligent Emergency Braking system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system operation . . . . 5-102 Turning the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105 Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109

System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-117 Turning the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127
Intelligent Driver Alertness (if so equipped) . . . . 5-128 Intelligent Driver Alertness system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129 How to enable/disable the Intelligent Driver Alertness system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130 Intelligent Driver Alertness system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-134
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-134 Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-134

Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135 Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . 5-137 Brake force distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
Chassis Control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138 Intelligent Trace Control (if so equipped) . . . . 5-138 Intelligent Ride Control (if so equipped) . . . . . 5-138
Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
Front and rear sonar system (if so equipped) . . 5-139 System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140 How to enable/disable the front and rear sonar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-142
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144 Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144 Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144 Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144 Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144 Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144 Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING
· Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
· Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children's access to car keys.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
· Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.
5-4 Starting and driving

· If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately.

· Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage.

· Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time.

· Keep the rear vent windows, lift gates, door and trunk lids (if so equipped) closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with one of these open, follow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the

air recirculation but-

ton to off and the fan control dial

to high to circulate the air.

· If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manufacturer's recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle.

· The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever: a. The vehicle is raised for service. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment. c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system. d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.
THREE-WAY CATALYST
WARNING
· The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.
· Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION
· Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst's ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants.
· Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause over rich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.
· Do not race the engine while warming it up.
· Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (if so equipped)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Starting and driving 5-5

Additional information:
· When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire.
· The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 25 km/h (16 mph). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a flat tire while driving).
· The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure of all your tires is adjusted. After the tires are inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 25 km/h (16 mph) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.

· The "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning message is displayed in the vehicle information display when the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. The "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning message turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off. The low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated until the tires are inflated to the recommended COLD tire pressure. The "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning message is displayed each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.
· The "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning is not displayed if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

· Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle's operation and the outside temperature. Do not reduce the tire pressure after driving because the tire pressure rises after driving. Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, check the tire pressure for all four tires.
· The Tire placard is located in the driver's door opening.
For additional information, see "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air " (P. 2-45) or "Low tire pressure warning light" (P. 2-12) "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 6-3).

5-6 Starting and driving

WARNING
· Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
· If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire placard to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. For additional information on changing a flat tire, see "Flat tire" (P. 6-3).

· When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, when a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
· Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
CAUTION
Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate.
Some examples are:
· Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
· If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle.
· If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light may illuminate in the following cases:
· If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and tire without TPMS.
· If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID has not been registered.
· If the wheel is not originally specified by NISSAN.

Starting and driving 5-7

FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference. (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
5-8 Starting and driving

TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert (if so equipped)
When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle to help you inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure.
Vehicle set-up:
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position (if so equipped).
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. Do not start the engine.
Operation:
1. Add air to the tire.
2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators will start flashing.
3. When the designated pressure is reached, the horn beeps once and the hazard indicators stop flashing.
4. Perform the above steps for each tire. · If the tire is over-inflated more than approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn beeps and the hazard indicators flash three times. To correct the pressure,

push the core of the valve stem on the tire briefly to release pressure. When the pressure reaches the designated pressure, the horn beeps once.
· If the hazard indicator does not flash within approximately 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not operating.
· The TPMS will not activate the Easy-Fill Tire Alert under the following conditions:
If there is interference from an external device or transmitter.
The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the tire.
There is a malfunction in the TPMS system.
There is a malfunction in the horn or hazard indicators.
The identification code of the tire's pressure sensor is not registered to the system.
The battery of the tire pressure sensor is low.
· If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not operate due to TPMS interference, move the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward or forward and try again.

If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a tire pressure gauge.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle.
As with any vehicle, loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways.
Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the "Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-

tem" section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side wheels may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle to follow the road while vehicle speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface. When all tires are on the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane.
· If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a "blow-out" can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under-inflated tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually inspecting the tires for wear and damage. For additional information, see

Starting and driving 5-9

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

"Wheels and tires" (P. 8-29). If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or "blows-out" while driving, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
WARNING
The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury. · The vehicle generally moves or pulls
in the direction of the flat tire. · Do not rapidly apply the brakes. · Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal. · Do not rapidly turn the steering
wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire. For additional information, see "Changing a flat tire" (P. 6-3).
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury.

LSD2645
WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency. (The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed three consecutive times in quick succession or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash and serious injury.

5-10 Starting and driving

When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will illuminate as follows:
Push center: · Once to change to ON. · Two times to change to OFF.
The ignition switch will automatically return to the LOCK position when any door is either opened or closed with the switch in the OFF position.
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch position cannot be placed in the OFF position until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position.
When the ignition switch cannot be pushed toward the OFF position, proceed as follows:
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch position will change to the ON position.
3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFF position.

The shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed.
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the ignition switch cannot be moved from the LOCK position.
Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed in the meter. For additional information, see "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" (P. 2-7).

LSD2089
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system's operating range becomes narrower and may not function properly.

Starting and driving 5-11

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition switch to start the engine.
The operating range of the engine start
function is inside of the vehicle O1 .
· The luggage area is not included in the operating range, but the Intelligent Key may function.
· If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument panel or inside the glove box, storage bin or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not function.
· If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key may function.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS
LOCK (Normal parking position)
The ignition switch can only be locked in this position.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed to the ON position while carrying the Intelligent Key.

The ignition switch will lock when any door is opened or closed with the ignition switched off.
ON
This ignition system and electrical accessory power activate at this position without the engine turned on.
The ON position has a battery saver feature that will place the ignition switch in the OFF position, if the vehicle is not running, after some time under the following conditions: · The shift lever is in P (Park). · All doors are closed.
The battery saver feature will be canceled if any of the following occur: · The shift lever is moved out of the P (Park)
position. · The ignition switch changes position. · Any door is opened.
CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON or AUTO ACC position when the engine is not running for an extended period. This can discharge the battery.

OFF
The ignition switch is in the OFF position when the engine is turned off using the ignition switch.
AUTO ACC:
With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, the Intelligent Key with you, and the ignition switch placed from the ON to the OFF position, the radio can still be used for a period of time, or until the driver's door is opened.
After a period of time, functions such as radio, navigation, and Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System may be restarted by pressing the "POWER button/VOLUME control knob" or the key fob unlock button. For additional information, see "Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems" (P. 4-2).
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following procedure: · Rapidly push the ignition switch three
consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or · Push and hold the ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.

5-12 Starting and driving

STARTING THE ENGINE

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® BATTERY DISCHARGE
If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® is discharged, or environmental conditions interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine according to the following procedure:
1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.
3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)
After step 3 is performed, when the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will change to ACC.
4. Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the chime sounds. The engine will start.

NOTE:
· When the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ON position or the engine is started by the above procedure, the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears in the vehicle information display even when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key again.
· If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears, replace the battery as soon as possible. For additional information, see "Battery replacement" (P. 8-21).

1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Continuously Variable Transmission
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or if the key is removed from the ignition switch.
The starter is designed not to operate if the shift lever is in any of the driving positions.
Manual Transmission
Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depress the clutch pedal to the floor.
The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. Depress the brake pedal and the clutch pedal (if so equipped) and push the ignition switch to start the engine.
To start the engine immediately, push and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch in any position.

Starting and driving 5-13

· If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while holding, crank the engine. Release the switch and the accelerator pedal when the engine starts.
· If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Push the ignition switch to the ON position to start cranking the engine. After for 5-6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the ignition switch to LOCK. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by depressing the brake pedal and pushing the pushbutton ignition switch to start the engine. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 23 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start.
5. To stop the engine, with the intelligent key inside the vehicle, shift the lever to the P (Park) position or to N (Neutral) and apply the parking brake (Manual Transmission) and push the ignition switch to the OFF position.
NOTE: Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

2. The vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.
REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)
Vehicles started with the Remote Engine Start require the ignition switch to be placed in the ON position before the shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position. To place the ignition switch in the ON position, follow these steps:
1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on you.
2. Apply the brake.
3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON position.
For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" (P. 3-2).

5-14 Starting and driving

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so equipped)
WARNING
· Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low). Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.
· Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.
· Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.
· Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission.

Starting the vehicle
WARNING
· Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low). Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.
· Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.
· Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.
· Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission.

Starting and driving 5-15

CAUTION
· Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.
· To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift lever out of the P (Park) position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift lever into a driving gear.
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion.
4. Stop the vehicle completely before shifting the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
The CVT is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
5-16 Starting and driving

The shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK or OFF position.

Shifting
To move the shift lever:

LSD4007

Press the button OA while depressing
the brake pedal

Press the button OA to shift

Shift without pressing button OA

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever from P (Park) to any of the desired shift positions.
WARNING
· Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.
· If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position while the engine is running and the foot brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.
After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal, press the shift lever button and move the shift lever out of the P (Park) position.
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or ACC position for any reason while the shift lever is in any position other than the P (Park) position, the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position.

If the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position, perform the following steps:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position while depressing the foot brake pedal.
3. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
4. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
P (Park)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the P (Park) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake pedal must be depressed and the shift lever button pressed in to move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then place the shift lever into the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be depressed and the shift lever button pressed to move the shift lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving.
D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal forward driving.

Starting and driving 5-17

L (Low) Use this position for maximum engine braking on steep downhill gradients/ climbing steep slopes and whenever approaching sharp bends. Do not use the L (Low) position in any other circumstances.
5-18 Starting and driving

LSD2914
Manual shift mode (if so equipped)
When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and the drive sport mode switch is pushed, the transmission is ready for the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually by pulling the right-side or left-side paddle shifter.
When shifting up, pull the right side paddle
shifter (+) OB . The transmission shifts to the
higher range.
When shifting down, pull the left side
paddle shifter (-) OA . The transmission
shifts to the lower range.

When canceling the manual shift mode, push the drive sport mode switch. The transmission returns to the normal driving mode. When you pull the paddle shifter while in the D (Drive) position with the drive sport mode switch pushed, the transmission will shift to the upper or lower range temporarily. The transmission will automatically return to the drive sport mode after a short period of time. If you want to return to the drive sport mode manually, pull and hold the paddle shifter for about 1.5 seconds.
In the manual shift mode, the shift range is displayed on the position indicator in the meter.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
M8 (8th) and M7 (7th)
Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds.
M6 (6th) and M5 (5th)
Use this position when driving up long slopes or for engine braking when driving down long slopes.

M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd)
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades.
M1 (1st)
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades. · Remember not to drive at high speeds for
extended periods of time in lower than the 8th range. This reduces fuel economy.
When shifting up
Use the + (up) side paddle shifter. (Shifts to higher range.)
When shifting down
Use the - (down) side paddle shifter. (Shifts to lower range.)
When canceling the manual shift mode
To cancel manual shift mode, push the drive sport mode switch on the shift lever or press and hold either paddle shifter. · In the manual shift mode, the trans-
mission may not shift to the selected gear. This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control.

· In the manual shift mode, the transmission may shift up automatically to a higher range than selected if the engine speed is too high. When the vehicle speed decreases, the transmission automatically shifts down and shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop.
· Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) operation is limited to automatic drive mode when CVT fluid temperature is extremely low even if manual shift mode is selected. This is not a malfunction. When CVT fluid warms up, manual mode can be selected.
· When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the shift range may upshift in lower rpm than usual. This is not a malfunction.

LSD3739
Shift lock release
It will be necessary to jump start or have your battery charged. For additional information, see "Jump starting" (P. 6-9). It is recommended that you contact a NISSAN dealer or a professional towing service.
To move the shift lever, complete the following procedure:
1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
2. Apply the parking brake.

Starting and driving 5-19

3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a 3 mm screwdriver, remove the shift lock release cover. · If available, a plastic trim tool can also be used.
4. Insert the small screwdriver in the shift lock release slot and push down.
5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position while holding down the shift lock release.
6. Push the ignition switch to the ON position to unlock the steering wheel. Now the vehicle may be moved to the desired location.
WARNING
If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.
5-20 Starting and driving

LSD3584
Drive sport mode switch
When the drive sport mode switch is pushed with the shift lever in the D (Drive) position, the drive sport mode indicator light illuminates in the instrument panel. For additional information, see "Drive sport mode indicator light" (P. 2-16).
Use the drive sport mode when you need improved engine braking.
To turn off the drive sport mode, push the drive sport mode switch again. The drive sport mode indicator light will turn off.
Each time the engine is started, or when the shift lever is moved to any position

other than D (Drive), the drive sport mode will automatically turn off.
Accelerator downshift -- in D (Drive) position --
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed.
Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the Continuously Variable Transmission will not be shifted into the selected driving position.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is activated. For additional information, see "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" (P. 2-13). This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait for 10 seconds. Then place the ignition switch back in the ON position. The vehicle

should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have the transmission checked and repaired, if necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protection mode or fail-safe operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal operation, or have it repaired if necessary.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (M/T) (if so equipped)
WARNING
· Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.

· Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of control or engine damage.
· Do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Doing so may result in an accident due to loss of engine braking.
CAUTION
· Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This may cause clutch damage.
· Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting to help prevent transmission damage.
· Stop your vehicle completely before shifting into R (Reverse).
· When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running (for example, at a stop light), shift to N (Neutral) and release the clutch pedal with the foot brake applied.
· Do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Doing so may result in an accident due to loss of engine braking.

SSD0552
Shifting
To change gears or when upshifting or downshifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into the appropriate gear, then release the clutch slowly and smoothly.
To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the transmission is shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Transmission damage may occur.
Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence according to vehicle speed.
Starting and driving 5-21

PARKING BRAKE

ECO MODE SWITCH

To back up, lift up on the shift lever ring O1
and then move it to the R (Reverse) position after stopping the vehicle completely.
The shift lever ring O1 returns to its original
position when the shift lever is moved to the N (Neutral) position.
If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then release the clutch pedal. Depress the clutch pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).
CAUTION
Do not over rev your engine to avoid future possible damages.

WARNING
· Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident.
· Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle.
· Do not use the shift lever in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged.
· To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

LSD3737
The ECO mode helps to enhance the fuel economy by controlling the throttle sensitivity and transmission points.
To turn on the ECO mode, push the ECO mode switch. The ECO mode indicator light (on the meter or vehicle information display) will remain lit while the mode is active.
To turn off the ECO mode, push the ECO mode switch again. The ECO mode indicator light (on the meter or vehicle information display) will turn off.

5-22 Starting and driving

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) (if so equipped)

The ECO mode cannot be turned off while the accelerator pedal is depressed, even if the ECO mode switch is pushed off. Release the accelerator pedal to turn off the ECO mode.
The ECO mode will turn off automatically if a malfunction occurs in the system.
Turn off the ECO mode or depress the accelerator pedal fully when: · Driving with a heavy load of passengers
or cargo in the vehicle · Driving on a steep uphill slope · ECO mode may affect air conditioner
performance
NOTE:
Selecting this drive mode will not necessarily improve fuel economy as many driving factors influence its effectiveness.

LSD3831
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death. · This system is only a warning device
to inform the driver of a potential unintended lane departure. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

The LDW system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 60 km/h (37 mph) and above, and only when the lane markings are clearly visible on the road.
The LDW system monitors the lane markers on the traveling lane using the camera
unit OA located above the inside mirror.
The LDW system warns the driver that the vehicle is beginning to leave the driving lane with an indicator and a steering wheel vibration. For additional information, see "Lane Departure Warning system operation" (P. 5-24).

Starting and driving 5-23

left or the right side of the traveling lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and the LDW indicator on the instrument panel will blink to alert the driver.
The warning function will stop when the vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.

LSD3291

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display

LDW SYSTEM OPERATION

at speeds of approximately 60 km/h (37 mph)

The LDW system provides a lane departure and above and the lane markings are clear.

warning function when the vehicle is driven When the vehicle approaches either the

5-24 Starting and driving

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display

LSD3945

Starting and driving 5-25

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDW system.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Lane" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Lane Departure Warning" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE LDW SYSTEM
5-26 Starting and driving

LSD3486

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display

LSD3946

LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the LDW system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death.
· The system will not operate at speeds below approximately 60 km/h (37 mph) or if it cannot detect lane markers.
· Do not use the LDW system under the following conditions as it may not function properly:
During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
When driving on slippery roads, such as on ice or snow.
When driving on winding or uneven roads.
When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.
When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.
When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.

Starting and driving 5-27

When driving without normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, low tire pressure, installation of spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard wheels).
When the vehicle is equipped with non-original brake parts or suspension parts.
When you are towing a trailer or other vehicle.
· The system may not function properly under the following conditions:
On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane markers; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.
On roads where the discontinued lane markers are still detectable.
On roads where there are sharp curves.
On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The LDW system could detect these items as lane markers.)
5-28 Starting and driving

On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.
When the vehicle's traveling direction does not align with the lane marker.
When traveling close to the vehicle in front of you, which obstructs the lane camera unit detection range.
When rain, snow, dirt or an object adheres to the windshield in front of the lane camera unit.
When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
When strong light enters the lane camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 40°C [104°F]) and then started, the LDW system may be deactivated automatically and the following message will appear in the vehicle information display: "Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature" or "Unavailable: High Camera Temperature".
When the interior temperature is reduced, the LDW system will resume operating automatically.
The LDW system is not designed to warn under the following conditions:
· When you operate the lane change signal and change traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The LDW system will become operable again approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.)
· When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 60 km/h (37 mph).
After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the LDW functions will resume.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the LDW system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically and "Not Available System Malfunction" will appear in the vehicle information display. If "Not Available System Malfunction" appears in the vehicle information display, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and the ignition switch in the OFF position and restart the engine/motor. If "Not Available System Malfunction" continues to appear in the vehicle information display, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD3484
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The lane camera unit O1 for the LDW sys-
tem is located above the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of the LDW system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
· Always keep the windshield clean.
· Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.

· Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's capability of detecting the lane markers.
· Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Starting and driving 5-29

INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION (if so equipped)

LSD3831
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Intelligent Lane Intervention system could result in serious injury or death. · The Intelligent Lane Intervention
system will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
5-30 Starting and driving

· The Intelligent Lane Intervention system is primarily intended for use on well-developed freeways or highways. It may not detect the lane markers in certain road, weather, or driving conditions.
The Intelligent Lane Intervention system must be turned on with the dynamic driver assistance switch (if so equipped), every time the ignition is placed in the ON position.
The Intelligent Lane Intervention system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 70 km/h (45 mph) and above, and only when the lane markings are clearly visible on the road.
The Intelligent Lane Intervention system warns the driver when the vehicle has left the center of the traveling lane with an indicator and a steering wheel vibration. The system helps assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane by applying the brakes to the left or right wheels individually (for a short period of time).
The Intelligent Lane Intervention system monitors the lane markers on the traveling
lane using the camera unit OA located
above the inside mirror.

LSD4008

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display

INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION 1 Dynamic driver assistance switch (if so

SYSTEM OPERATION

equipped)

2 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator 3 Intelligent Lane Intervention indicator
The Intelligent Lane Intervention system operates above approximately 70 km/h (45 mph). When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and the LDW indicator (orange) on the instrument panel will blink to alert the driver. Then, the Intelligent Lane Intervention system will automatically apply the brakes for a short period of time to help assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane.
To turn on the Intelligent Lane Intervention system, push the dynamic driver assistance switch (if so equipped) after starting the engine/motor. The Intelligent Lane Intervention indicator on the instrument panel will illuminate. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch (if so equipped) again to turn off the Intelligent Lane Intervention system. The Intelligent Lane Intervention indicator will turn off.

Starting and driving 5-31

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
5-32 Starting and driving

LSD4009

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the Intelligent Lane Intervention system.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Lane" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Lane Departure Prevention" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

4. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch (if so equipped) to turn the system on or off.

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION SYSTEM

LSD3949

Starting and driving 5-33

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
5-34 Starting and driving

LSD3948

INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the Intelligent Lane Intervention system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Intelligent Lane Intervention system could result in serious injury or death.
· The Intelligent Lane Intervention system may activate if you change lanes without first activating your turn signal or, for example, if a construction zone directs traffic to cross an existing lane marker. If this occurs you may need to apply corrective steering to complete your lane change.
· Because the Intelligent Lane Intervention may not activate under the road, weather, and lane marker conditions described in this section, it may not activate every time your vehicle begins to leave its lane and you will need to apply corrective steering.

· When the Intelligent Lane Intervention system is operating, avoid excessive or sudden steering maneuvers. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle.
· The Intelligent Lane Intervention system will not operate at speeds below approximately 70 km/h (45 mph) or if it cannot detect lane markers.
· Do not use the Intelligent Lane Intervention system under the following conditions as it may not function properly:
During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
When driving on slippery roads, such as on ice or snow.
When driving on winding or uneven roads.
When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.
When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.
When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.

When driving without normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, low tire pressure, installation of spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard wheels).
When the vehicle is equipped with non-original brake parts or suspension parts.
When you are towing a trailer or other vehicle.
On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane markers; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.
On roads where discontinued lane markers are still detectable.
On roads where there are sharp curves.
On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The Intelligent Lane Intervention system could detect these items as lane markers.)

On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.
When the vehicle's traveling direction does not align with the lane marker.
When traveling close to the vehicle in front of you, which obstructs the lane camera unit detection range.
When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the windshield in front of the lane camera unit.
When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
When strong light enters the lane camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)
While the Intelligent Lane Intervention system is operating, you may hear a sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the Intelligent Lane Intervention system is operating properly.
Starting and driving 5-35

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
Condition A:
The warning and assist functions of the Intelligent Lane Intervention system are not designed to work under the following conditions: · When you operate the lane change signal
and change the traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The Intelligent Lane Intervention system will be deactivated for approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.) · When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 70 km/h (45 mph).
After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the warning and assist functions will resume.
Condition B:
The assist function of the Intelligent Lane Intervention system is not designed to work under the following conditions (warning is still functional): · When the brake pedal is depressed. · When the steering wheel is turned as far
as necessary for the vehicle to change lanes.
5-36 Starting and driving

· When the vehicle is accelerated during Intelligent Lane Intervention system operation.
· When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) approach warning occurs.
· When the hazard warning flashers are operated.
· When driving on a curve at high speed.
After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the Intelligent Lane Intervention system application of the brakes will resume.
Condition C:
If the following messages appear in the vehicle information display, the Intelligent Lane Intervention system will be turned off automatically.
· "Not Available Poor Road Conditions": When the VDC system (except Traction Control System [TCS] function) or ABS operates.
· "Currently not available": When the VDC system is turned off.

Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, turn off the Intelligent Lane Intervention system. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch (if so equipped) again to turn the Intelligent Lane Intervention system back on.
Temporary disabled status at high temperature:
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 40°C [104°F]) and then the Intelligent Lane Intervention system is turned on, the Intelligent Lane Intervention system may be deactivated automatically and the following message will appear on the vehicle information display: "Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature" or "Unavailable: High Camera Temperature". When the interior temperature is reduced, the system will resume operating automatically.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the Intelligent Lane Intervention system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically. The LDW indicator (orange) will illuminate in the display.
If the LDW indicator (orange) illuminates in the display, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle. Turn the engine/ motor off and restart the engine/motor. If the LDW indicator (orange) continues to illuminate, have the Intelligent Lane Intervention system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD3484
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The lane camera unit O1 for the Intelligent
Lane Intervention system is located above the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of the Intelligent Lane Intervention system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
· Always keep the windshield clean.
· Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.

Starting and driving 5-37

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so equipped)

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSW system could result in serious injury or death.
· The BSW system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW system.
The BSW system helps alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes.

LSD3832
The BSW system uses radar sensors O1
installed near the rear bumper to detect other vehicles in an adjacent lane.

SSD1030
Detection zone
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 3.0 m (10 ft) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 3.0 m (10 ft) sideways.

5-38 Starting and driving

The BSW system operates above approximately 32 km/h (20 mph).
If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes. The BSW indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicles leaves the detection zone.
The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal, then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes and no chime sounds. For additional information, see "BSW driving situations" (P. 5-43).

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

LSD3851

Starting and driving 5-39

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
5-40 Starting and driving

LSD3950

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE BSW SYSTEM

LSD3837

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSW system.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Blind Spot" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Blind Spot Warning" (if so equipped) or "Blind Spot (BSW)" (if so equipped) and press the OK button.

NOTE:
· When enabling/disabling the system, the system will retain current settings even if the engine is restarted.
· The RCTA system (if so equipped) is integrated into the BSW system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the RCTA system. When the BSW is disabled, the RCTA system is also disabled.
· When the BSW system is turned on, the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle information display illuminates.

Starting and driving 5-41

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
5-42 Starting and driving

LSD3951

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the BSW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. · The BSW system cannot detect all ve-
hicles under all conditions. · The radar sensors may not be able to
detect and activate BSW when certain objects are present such as: Pedestrian, bicycles, animals. Vehicles such as motorcycles, low
height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles. Oncoming vehicles. Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when you accelerate from a stop. A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as your vehicle. A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind. A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly.

A vehicle that passes through the detection zone quickly.
When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.
· The radar sensors' detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width. When driving in a wider lane, the radar sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors may detect vehicles driving two lanes away.
· The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects; however, objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operation condition.
· The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles:
Severe weather
Road spray
Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on the vehicle

· Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.
· Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
LSD2299
Illustration 1 Approaching from behind
BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS
Indicator on
Indicator off
Indicator flashing

Starting and driving 5-43

Another vehicle approaching from behind
Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane.
NOTE: · The radar sensors may not detect ve-
hicles which are approaching rapidly from behind.

NOTE:
· The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly from behind.
· If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

LSD2300
Illustration 2 Approaching from behind
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn signal when another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes.

5-44 Starting and driving

LSD2302
Illustration 3 Overtaking another vehicle
Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 3: The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 2 seconds.

LSD2303
Illustration 4 Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes.

NOTE:
· When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.
· The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.
· If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

Starting and driving 5-45

NOTE:
· If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.
· The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone.

LSD2305
Illustration 5 Entering from the side
Entering from the side
Illustration 5: The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from either side.

LSD2308
Illustration 6 Entering from the side
Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes.

5-46 Starting and driving

LSD3953

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The

"Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction"

warning message will appear and the
BSW/RCTA indicator (white) will blink OA in
the vehicle information display. The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system (if so equipped) will also stop working. Action to take: When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.
Malfunction
If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSW/RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle information display.
Starting and driving 5-47

NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system will also stop working.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
5-48 Starting and driving

LSD3952

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA) (if so equipped)

LSD4010
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The radar sensors O1 for the BSW and RCTA
systems are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RCTA system could result in serious injury or death.
· The RCTA system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When backing out of a parking space, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move. Never rely solely on the RCTA system.
The RCTA system will assist you when backing out from a parking space. When the vehicle is in reverse, the system is designed to detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left of the vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.

Starting and driving 5-49

The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an approaching vehicle when the driver is backing out of a parking space.
When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 8 km/h (5 mph), the RCTA system is operational.
If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from either side, the system chimes (once) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes on the side the vehicle is approaching from.

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display

RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

LSD3851

5-50 Starting and driving

LSD2216

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display

LSD3950

Starting and driving 5-51

LSD4010
The RCTA system uses radar sensors O1
installed on both sides near the rear bumper to detect an approaching vehicle.
The radar sensors O1 can detect an ap-
proaching vehicle from up to approximately 20 m (66 ft) away.

5-52 Starting and driving

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE RCTA SYSTEM

LSD3839

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the RCTA system.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Rear Cross Traffic Alert" and press the OK button.
When the RCTA system is turned on, the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle information display illuminates.

NOTE:
· The RCTA system is integrated into the BSW system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the RCTA system. When the BSW is disabled, the RCTA system is also disabled.
· When enabling/disabling the system, the system setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.

LSD3954

Starting and driving 5-53

RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS 5-54 Starting and driving

LSD3195
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the RCTA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

· Always check surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before backing up. The radar sensors detect approaching (moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as:
Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles, animals or child-operated toy vehicles
A vehicle that is passing at speeds greater than approximately 30 km/h (19 mph)
A vehicle that is passing at speeds lower than approximately 8 km/h (5 mph)
· The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations:
Illustration OA : When a vehicle
parked next to you obstructs the beam of the radar sensor.
Illustration OB : When the vehicle is
parked in an angled parking space.
Illustration OC : When the vehicle is
parked on inclined ground.
Illustration OD : When an ap-
proaching vehicle turns into your vehicle's parking lot aisle.

Illustration OE : When the angle
formed by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small.
· The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles:
Severe weather
Road spray
Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on the vehicle
· Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.
· Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

NOTE:

Illustration 1

LSD2043

In the case of several vehicles approaching in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not be sounded by the RCTA system after the first vehicle passes the sensors.

Illustration 2

LSD2044

Starting and driving 5-55

LSD3953

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The

"Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction"

5-56 Starting and driving

warning message will appear and the
BSW/RCTA indicator (white) will blink OA in
the vehicle information display.
The systems are not available until the conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system will also stop working.
Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.
Malfunction
When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSW/ RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle information display.

NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system (if so equipped) will also stop working.
Action to take Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display

LSD3952

Starting and driving 5-57

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)
Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.

LSD3251

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL

1. RES + switch

2. CANCEL switch

3. SET - switch

4. Cruise control switch

· If the cruise control system malfunctions,

it cancels automatically. The

indica-

tor in the instrument panel then blinks to

warn the driver. For additional informa-

tion, see "Vehicle information display 4.2

inch (11 cm) TYPE A" (P. 2-17) or "Vehicle

information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type B"

(P. 2-32).

· If the

indicator blinks, push the

Cruise control switch off and have the

system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

· The

indicator may blink when the

Cruise control switch is pushed ON while

pushing the RES +, SET - , or CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise control

system, use the following procedures.

WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions: · When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed. · In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies
in speed. · On winding or hilly roads. · On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,
etc.). · In very windy areas.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 35 - 144 km/h (22 - 89 mph) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the

main switch. The

indicator in the in-

strument panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the SETswitch or RES+ switch, and release it. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed.

NOTE:

If pushed the RES+ switch and released it when there is no set speed, the set speed is set to the current speed.
· To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed.
· The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods:

· Push the CANCEL switch, or

· Tap the brake pedal, or

· Turn the main switch off. The

indica-

tor in the instrument panel goes out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled if:
· You depress the brake or clutch pedal while pushing the RES+ or SET- switch. The preset speed is deleted from memory.
· The vehicle slows down more than 13 km/h (8 mph) below the set speed.
· You depress the clutch pedal (M/T) or move the shift lever to N (Neutral) (CVT).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
· Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET- switch.
· Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.
· Push and release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed increases by about 1.6 km/h (1 mph).

Starting and driving 5-59

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC) (if so equipped)
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods: · Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-
hicle attains the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it. · Push and hold the SET- switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed. · Push and release the SET- switch. Each time you do this, the set speed decreases by about 1.6 km/h (1 mph).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle returns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 35 km/h (22 mph).

5-60 Starting and driving

OA ICC switch

LSD3317

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ICC system could result in serious injury or death.
· The ICC system is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
· Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.
· Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ICC system. Read and understand the Owner's Manual thoroughly before using the ICC system. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle's speed in emergency situations. Do not use the ICC system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.

· In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, a warning chime will not sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead. Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur.
The ICC system maintains a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you within the speed range of 0 to 144 km/h (0 to 90 mph), up to the set speed. The set speed can be selected by the driver between 30 to 144 km/h (20 to 90 mph).
The vehicle travels at a set speed when the road ahead is clear.
The ICC system can be set to one of two cruise control modes:
· Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: For maintaining a selected distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you up to the preset speed
· Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode: For cruising at a preset speed

Push the ICC switch OA to choose the
cruise control mode between the vehicleto-vehicle distance control mode and the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode.
Once a control mode is activated, it cannot be changed to the other cruise control mode. To change the mode, push the ICC
switch OA once to turn the system off. Then push the ICC switch OA again to turn the
system back on and select the desired cruise control mode.
Always confirm the setting in the ICC system display.
For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, see "Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode" (P. 5-62).
For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, see "Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode" (P. 5-80).

Starting and driving 5-61

HOW TO SELECT THE CRUISE CONTROL MODE
Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: To choose the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode O1 , quickly push and release the ICC switch OA .
Selecting the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode: To choose the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
O2 , push and hold the ICC switch OA for
longer than approximately 1.5 seconds. For additional information, see "Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode" (P. 5-80).
5-62 Starting and driving

LSD3318

LSD4089
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the ICC system automatically maintains a selected distance from the vehicle traveling in front of you according to that vehicle's speed (up to the set speed), or at the set speed when the road ahead is clear.
The ICC system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction.

If the radar sensor O1 detects a slower
moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the selected distance.
The system automatically controls the throttle and applies the brakes (up to approximately 40% of vehicle braking power) if necessary.
The detection range of the sensor is approximately 200 m (650 ft) ahead.

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE OPERATION

LSD3955
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is designed to maintain a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you and can reduce the speed to match a
Starting and driving 5-63

slower vehicle ahead. The system will decelerate the vehicle as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC system can only apply up to 40% of the vehicle's total braking power.
This system should only be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or when vehicle speeds change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer because the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a warning chime and blink the system display to notify the driver to take necessary action.
The system will cancel and a warning chime will sound if the speed is below approximately 25 km/h (15 mph) and a vehicle is not detected ahead. The system will also disengage when the vehicle goes above the maximum set speed.
For additional information, see "Approach warning" (P. 5-70).
5-64 Starting and driving

The following items are controlled in the ICC system:
· When there are no vehicles traveling ahead, the ICC system maintains the speed set by the driver. The set speed range is between approximately 32 and 144 km/h (20 and 90 mph).
· When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, the ICC system adjusts the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges a standstill with a warning chime.
· When the vehicle traveling ahead has moved out from its lane of travel, the ICC system accelerates and maintains vehicle speed up to the set speed.
The ICC system does not control vehicle speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates or traffic congestion.

SSD0254
When driving on the freeway at a set speed and approaching a slower traveling vehicle ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, the ICC system will accelerate and maintain the speed up to the set speed. Pay attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you will have to manually control the vehicle speed.

Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle ahead, this system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate your vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane change. Depress the brake pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead due to its sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC system.

LSD3265
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE SWITCHES
The system is operated by the ICC switch and four control switches, all mounted on the steering wheel.
1. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed.
2. RES+ switch:
Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally.

3. DISTANCE switch: Changes the vehicle's following distance: · Long · Middle · Short
4. ICC switch: Master switch to activate the system.
5. SET- switch: Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally.

Starting and driving 5-65

LSD3320
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode display and indicators
The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer.
1. This indicator indicates the ICC system status depending on a color: · ICC system ON indicator (gray): Indicates that the ICC switch is on. · ICC system SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set.

· ICC system warning (yellow): Indicates that there is a malfunction in the ICC system.
2. Set vehicle speed indicator:
Indicates the set vehicle speed.
3. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:
Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front of you.
4. Set distance indicator:
Displays the selected distance between vehicles set with the distance switch.

LSD3819
Operating vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
To turn on the cruise control, quickly push
and release the ICC switch OA . The ICC sys-
tem ON indicator (white), set distance indi-
cator and set vehicle speed indicator OB
come on in a standby state for setting.

5-66 Starting and driving

· When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or L (Low) (if so equipped) position
· When the parking brake is applied
· When the brakes are operated by the driver

LSD3820
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET-
switch OC and release it. The ICC system
set indicator (green), vehicle ahead detection indicator, set distance indicator and
set vehicle speed indicator OB will come on.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.
When the SET- switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set and the ICC indicators will blink for approximately 2 seconds:
· When traveling below 32 km/h (20 mph) and a vehicle ahead is not detected

LSD3065
When the SET- switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set.
A warning chime will sound and a message will pop up: · When the VDC system is off (To use the
ICC system, turn on the VDC system. Push the ICC switch to turn off the ICC system and reset the ICC switch by pushing the ICC switch again.) For additional information about the VDC system, see "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P. 5-137). · When ABS or VDC is operating
Starting and driving 5-67

· When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC system, make sure the wheels are no longer slipping. Push the ICC switch to turn off the ICC system, and reset the ICC system by pushing the ICC switch again.)

LSD3821
1 System set display with vehicle ahead 2 System set display without vehicle
ahead
Vehicle detected ahead
When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by controlling the throttle and applying the brakes to match the speed of a slower vehicle ahead. The system then controls the vehicle speed based on the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver selected distance.

NOTE:
· The stop lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the ICC system.
· When the brake operates, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.
When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC system will also display the set speed and selected distance.
Vehicle ahead not detected
When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC system then maintains the set speed.
When a vehicle is no longer detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.
If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to the set vehicle speed or any time the ICC system is in operation, the system controls the distance to that vehicle.
When a vehicle is no longer detected under approximately 24 km/h (15 mph), the system will be canceled.

5-68 Starting and driving

LSD3324
When passing another vehicle, the set
speed indicator OA will flash when the ve-
hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect indicator will turn off when the area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
Even though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC system, you can depress the accelerator pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle rapidly.

How to change the set vehicle speed
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following methods:
· Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.
· Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.
· Turn the ICC switch off. The ICC indicators will go out.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following methods:
· Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET- switch.
· Push and hold the RES+ switch. The set vehicle speed will increase by approximately 5 km/h (5 mph).
· Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by approximately 1 km/h (1 mph).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following methods:
· Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it.
· Push and hold the SET- switch. The set vehicle speed will decrease by approximately 5 km/h (5 mph).
· Push, then quickly release the SETswitch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by approximately 1 km/h (1 mph).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 32 km/h (20 mph).

Starting and driving 5-69

LSD2683
How to change the set distance to the vehicle ahead
The distance to the vehicle ahead can be selected at any time depending on the traffic conditions.
Each time the distance switch OA is
pushed, the set distance will change to long, middle, short and back to long again, in that sequence.

LSD2636

Distance Approximate distance at 100 km/h (60 mph) [m (ft)]

1. Long

60 (200)

2. Middle 45 (150)

3. Short 30 (90)

· The distance to the vehicle ahead will change according to the vehicle speed. The higher the vehicle speed, the longer the distance.

· If the engine is stopped, the set distance becomes "long." (Each time the engine is started, the initial setting becomes "long.")

Approach warning
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the driver with the chime and ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if:
· The chime sounds.
· The vehicle ahead detection indicator blinks.
The warning chime may not sound in some cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples are:
· When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing.
· When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing.
· When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.
The warning chime will not sound when:
· The vehicle approaches other vehicles that are parked or moving slowly.
· The accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system.

5-70 Starting and driving

NOTE:
The approach warning chime may sound and the system display may blink when the ICC sensor detects objects on the side of the vehicle or on the side of the road. This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The ICC sensor may detect these objects when the vehicle is driven on winding roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or when entering or exiting a curve. In these cases, you will have to manually control the proper distance ahead of your vehicle.
Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some damage).

Automatic cancellation
A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled: · When the vehicle ahead is not detected
and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 25 km/h (15 mph) · When the system judges the vehicle is at a standstill · When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) position, Manual mode or L (Low) range. · When the parking brake system is applied · When the VDC system is turned off · When VDC operates · When distance measurement becomes impaired due to adhesion of dirt or obstruction to the sensor · When a wheel slips · When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted

Starting and driving 5-71

VEHICLE--TO--VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the ICC system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. · The ICC system is primarily intended
for use on straight, dry, open roads with light traffic. It is not advisable to use the ICC system in city traffic or congested areas.
5-72 Starting and driving

SSD0252
· The ICC system will not adapt automatically to road conditions. This system should be used in evenly flowing traffic. Do not use the system on roads with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain or in fog.

· As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely on the ICC system. This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absentminded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.
· If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges that the vehicle has come to a standstill and sound a warning chime. To prevent the vehicle from moving, the driver must depress the brake pedal.
· Always pay attention to the operation of the vehicle and be ready to manually control the proper following distance. The ICC system may not be able to maintain the selected distance between vehicles (following distance) or selected vehicle speed under some circumstances.

· The system may not detect the vehicle in front of you in certain road or weather conditions. To avoid accidents, never use the ICC system under the following conditions:

On roads where the traffic is heavy or there are sharp curves

On slippery road surfaces such as on ice or snow, etc.

During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)

When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the bumper around the distance sensor

On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may go beyond the set vehicle speed and frequent braking may result in overheating the brakes)

On repeated uphill and downhill roads

When traffic conditions make it

difficult to keep a proper distance

between vehicles because of fre-

quent

acceleration

deceleration

Interference by other radar sources

· Do not use the ICC system if you are towing a trailer. The system may not detect a vehicle ahead.
· In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come into the sensor detection zone and cause automatic braking. Always stay alert and avoid using the ICC system where not recommended in this warning section.
The radar sensor will not detect the following objects:
· Stationary and slow moving vehicles
· Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
· Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
· Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane
The sensor generally detects the signals returned from the vehicle ahead. Therefore, if the sensor cannot detect the reflection from the vehicle ahead, the ICC system may not maintain the selected distance.
The following are some conditions in which the sensor cannot properly detect a vehicle ahead and the system may not operate properly:
· When snow or road spray from traveling vehicles reduces the sensor's detection.

· When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the trunk of your vehicle.
The ICC system is designed to automatically check the sensor's operation within the limitations of the system.
When the sensor is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the system will automatically be canceled. If the sensor is covered with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC system may not detect them. In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to check and clean the sensor regularly.
The detection zone of the ICC sensor is limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection mode to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead.
A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the centerline of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the
Starting and driving 5-73

lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane. If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver may have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead.
5-74 Starting and driving

SSD0252

When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under construction, the ICC sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle.
The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.

SSD0253
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead.

Starting and driving 5-75

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
5-76 Starting and driving

LSD4084
The following are conditions in which the ICC system may be temporarily unavailable. In these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to

maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead.
Condition A
Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled. A chime will sound and the system will not be able to be set: · When the VDC system is turned off · When the VDC or ABS operates · When a vehicle ahead is not detected and
your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 24 km/h (15 mph) · When the system judges the vehicle is at a standstill · When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or L (Low) (if so equipped) position · When the parking brake is applied · When a wheel slips · When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted
Action to take
When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off using the ICC switch. Turn the ICC system back on to use the system.

Condition B
When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, the ICC system will automatically be canceled, the chime will sound and the "Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner's Manual" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take
When the conditions listed above are no longer present, the warning message will no longer be available in the vehicle information display and the system will operate normally. If the "Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner's Manual" warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Condition C
When the radar sensor area of the front bumper is covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc., or is obstructed, the ICC system will automatically be canceled.

The chime will sound and the "Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner's Manual" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the "Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner's Manual" warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Condition D
When driving on roads with limited road structures (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the "Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner's Manual" message.

Action to take
When the above driving conditions no longer exist, turn the system back on.
Condition E
When the ICC system is not operating properly, a chime sounds and the ICC system warning light (orange) will come on.

Starting and driving 5-77

NOTE:
If the ICC system is temporarily unavailable, the conventional cruise control mode may still be used. For additional information, see "Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode" (P. 5-80).

LSD3861
Action to take If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving and set the ICC system again. If it is not possible to set the system or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
5-78 Starting and driving

LSD3826
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sensor for the ICC system OA is located
on the front of the vehicle.
To keep the ICC system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:
· Always keep the sensor area of the front bumper/emblem clean.
· Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor. Do not touch or remove the screw located on the sensor. Doing so could cause failure or malfunction. If the sensor is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you contact a NISSAN dealer.

· Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction.
· Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.
· Do not alter, remove, or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper/emblem, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada
Model: ARS4B
IC: 4135A-ARS4B
FCC ID: OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation..
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et

2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body.
The transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements IC établies pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.
FCC Notice
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Starting and driving 5-79

CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed) CRUISE CONTROL MODE
This mode allows driving at a speed between 40 to 144 km/h (25 to 90 mph) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
WARNING
· In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, a warning chime does not sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead, as neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-tovehicle distance is detected.
· Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur.
· Always confirm the setting in the ICC system display.
· Do not use the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode when driving under the following conditions: When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed
5-80 Starting and driving

In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed
On winding or hilly roads On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,
etc.) In very windy areas · Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

LSD3271
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control switches
1. CANCEL switch: Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed
2. RES+ switch: Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally
3. ICC switch: Master switch to activate the system
4. SET- switch: Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally

· Cruise control warning (yellow): Indicates that there is a malfunction in the ICC system
2. Set vehicle speed indicator: This indicator indicates the set vehicle speed. For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.

LSD3069
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and indicators
The display is located in the vehicle information display.
1. Cruise indicator: This indicator indicates the condition of the ICC system depending on a color. · Cruise control ON indicator (gray): Indicates that the ICC switch is on · Cruise control SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set

LSD3327
Operating conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push and hold the
ICC switch OA for longer than about
1.5 seconds.
When pushing ICC switch on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
display and indicators OB are displayed in
the vehicle information display. After you hold ICC switch on for longer than about 1.5 seconds, the ICC system display turns off. The cruise indicator appears. You can
Starting and driving 5-81

now set your desired cruising speed. Pushing the ICC switch again will turn the system completely off. When the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position, the system is also automatically turned off. To use the ICC system again, quickly push and release the ICC switch (vehicle-to vehicle distance control mode) or push and hold it (conventional cruise control mode) again to turn it on.
CAUTION To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the ICC switch off when not using the ICC system.
5-82 Starting and driving

LSD3327
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the SETswitch and release it. (The color of the cruise indicator changes to green and set vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.
· To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
· The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, manually maintain vehicle speed.

To cancel the preset speed, use any of the following methods:
1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
3. Turn the ICC switch off. Both the cruise indicator and vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET- switch.
2. Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, release the switch.
3. Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1.6 km/h (1 mph).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it.

2. Push and hold the SET- switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed.
3. Push, then quickly release the SETswitch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1.6 km/h (1 mph).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 40 km/h (25 mph).

System temporarily unavailable
A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled:

LSD3305
· When the vehicle slows down more than 13 km/h (8 mph) below the set speed
· When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or manual shift mode
Starting and driving 5-83

REAR AUTOMATIC BRAKING (RAB) (if so equipped)

· When the parking brake is applied
· When the VDC operates (including the traction control system)
· When a wheel slips
When the system is not operating properly, the chime sounds and the color of the cruise indicator will change to orange.
Action to take
If the color of the cruise indicator changes to orange, stop the vehicle in a safe place and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving, and then perform the setting again.
If it is not possible to set or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RAB system could result in serious injury or death.
· The RAB system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for proper driving procedures. Always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction you will move before and while backing up. Never rely solely on the RAB system. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
· There is a limitation to the RAB system capability. The RAB system is not effective in all situations.
· Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
The RAB system can assist the driver when the vehicle is backing up and approaching objects directly behind the vehicle.

LSD3754
The RAB system detects obstacles behind
the vehicle using the parking sensors O1
located on the rear bumper.
NOTE:
You can temporarily cancel the sonar function in the vehicle, but the RAB system will continue to operate. For additional information, please refer to "Rear Sonar System (RSS)" in this section.

5-84 Starting and driving

LSD3791

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display

RAB SYSTEM OPERATION

2 Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

1 RAB system warning light and RAB sys-

side)

tem warning indicator

3 Center display

When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), the RAB system operates.
If a risk of a collision with an obstacle is detected when your vehicle is backing up, the RAB system warning indicator will flash in the vehicle information display, a red frame will appear in the center display (for vehicles with the Intelligent Around View Monitor system), and the system will chime three times. The system will then automatically apply the brakes. After the automatic brake application, the driver must depress the brake pedal to maintain brake pressure.
NOTE:
· The brake lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the RAB system.
· When the brakes operate, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.

Starting and driving 5-85

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
5-86 Starting and driving

LSD3792

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Emergency Brake" and press the OK button.

3. To set the RAB system to on or off, use the OK button to check the box for "Rear."
When the RAB system is turned off, the RAB system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:

The RAB system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.

LSD3237

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display

TURNING THE RAB SYSTEM ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the RAB system ON or OFF.

Starting and driving 5-87

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
5-88 Starting and driving

RAB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the RAB system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RAB system could result in serious injury or death. · When the vehicle approaches an ob-
stacle while the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed, the function may not operate or the start of operation may be delayed. The RAB system may not operate or may not perform sufficiently due to vehicle conditions, driving conditions, the traffic environment, the weather, road surface conditions, etc. Do not wait for the system to operate. Operate the brake pedal by yourself as soon as necessary. · If it is necessary to override RAB operation, strongly press the accelerator pedal.
LSD3788

· Always check your surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before and while backing up. The RAB system detects stationary objects behind the vehicle. The RAB system does not detect the following objects:
Moving objects
Low objects
Narrow objects
Wedge-shaped objects
Objects close to the bumper (less than approximately 1 ft [30 cm])
Objects that suddenly appear
Thin objects such as rope, wire, chain, etc.
· The RAB system may not operate for the following obstacles:
Obstacles located high off the ground
Obstacles in a position offset from your vehicle
Obstacles, such as spongy materials or snow, that have soft outer surfaces and can easily absorb a sound wave

· The RAB system may not operate in the following conditions:
There is rain, snow, ice, dirt, etc., attached to the sonar sensors.
A loud sound is heard in the area around the vehicle.
The surface of the obstacle is diagonal to the rear of the vehicle.
· The RAB system may unintentionally operate in the following conditions:
There is overgrown grass in the area around the vehicle.
There is a structure (e.g., a wall, toll gate equipment, a narrow tunnel, a parking lot gate) near the side of the vehicle.
There are bumps, protrusions, or manhole covers on the road surface.
The vehicle drives through a draped flag or a curtain.
There is an accumulation of snow or ice behind the vehicle.
An ultrasonic wave source, such as another vehicle's sonar, is near the vehicle.

· Once the automatic brake control operates, it does not operate again if the vehicle approaches the same obstacle.
· The automatic brake control can only operate for a short period of time. Therefore, the driver must depress the brake pedal.
· In the following situations, the RAB system may not operate properly or may not function sufficiently:
The vehicle is driven in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
The vehicle is driven on a steep hill.
The vehicle's posture is changed (e.g., when driving over a bump).
The vehicle is driven on a slippery road.
The vehicle is turned sharply by turning the steering wheel fully.
Snow chains are used.
Wheels or tires other than NISSAN recommended are used.
The brakes are cold at low ambient temperatures or immediately after driving has started.

Starting and driving 5-89

The braking force becomes poor due to wet brakes after driving through a puddle or washing the vehicle.
· Turn the RAB system off in the following conditions to prevent the occurrence of an unexpected accident resulting from sudden system operation:
The vehicle is towed.
The vehicle is carried on a flatbed truck.
The vehicle is on the chassis dynamometer.
The vehicle drives on an uneven road surface.
The vehicle is towing an object (if so equipped).
Suspension parts other than those designated as Genuine NISSAN parts are used. (If the vehicle height or the vehicle body inclination is changed, the system may not detect an obstacle correctly.)
· Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, an open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
5-90 Starting and driving

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the RAB system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, the RAB system warning light will illuminate, and the "System fault" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning light illuminates, park the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the RAB system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NOTE:
If the RAB system cannot be operated temporarily, the RAB system warning light blinks.

LSD3754
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Observe the following items to ensure proper operation of the system:
· Always keep the parking sensors O1
clean.
· If the parking sensors are dirty, wipe them off with a soft cloth while being careful to not damage them.

INTELLIGENT EMERGENCY BRAKING (if so equipped)

· Do not subject the area around the park-
ing sensors O1 to strong impact. Also, do
not remove or disassemble the parking sensors. If the parking sensors and peripheral areas are deformed in an accident, etc., have the sensors checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· Do not install any stickers (including transparent stickers) or accessories on
the parking sensors O1 and their sur-
rounding areas. This may cause a malfunction or improper operation.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Intelligent Emergency Braking system could result in serious injury or death.
· The Intelligent Emergency Braking system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for the driver's attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques.
· The Intelligent Emergency Braking system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions.
The Intelligent Emergency Braking system can assist the driver when there is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.

LSD3749
The Intelligent Emergency Braking system
uses a radar sensor OA located on the front
of the vehicle to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

Starting and driving 5-91

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
INTELLIGENT EMERGENCY BRAKING SYSTEM OPERATION
5-92 Starting and driving

LSD3833

LSD3863

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

2. Intelligent Emergency Braking emer-

gency warning indicator

3. Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light
The Intelligent Emergency Braking system will function when your vehicle is driven at speeds above approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system will provide an initial warning to the driver by both a visual and audible alert.
If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully after the warning, and the Intelligent Emergency Braking system detects that there is still the possibility of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force. If the driver does not take action, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system issues the second visual warning and audible warning and also applies partial braking.
If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system applies harder braking automatically.
While the Intelligent Emergency Braking system is operating, you may hear the sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the Intelligent Emergency Braking system is operating properly.

Starting and driving 5-93

NOTE:
The vehicle's brake lights come on when braking is performed by the Intelligent Emergency Braking system.
Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the consequences of a collision, should one be unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering wheel, accelerating or braking, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system will function later or will not function.
The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions: · When the steering wheel is turned as far
as necessary to avoid a collision. · When the accelerator pedal is depressed. · When there is no longer a vehicle de-
tected ahead.
If the Intelligent Emergency Braking system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes are released.
5-94 Starting and driving

LSD3841

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display

TURNING THE INTELLIGENT EMERGENCY BRAKING SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to turn the Intelligent Emergency Braking system on or

ON/OFF

off.

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display

LSD3809

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Emergency Brake" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Front" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

When the Intelligent Emergency Braking system is turned off, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:
· The Intelligent Emergency Braking system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.
· The Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system is integrated into the Intelligent Emergency Braking system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system. When the Intelligent Emergency Braking is turned off, the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system is also turned off.

Starting and driving 5-95

INTELLIGENT EMERGENCY BRAKING SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the Intelligent Emergency Braking system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. · The Intelligent Emergency Braking
system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions. · The radar sensor does not detect the following objects: Pedestrians, animals or obstacles
in the roadway. Oncoming vehicles. Crossing vehicles. · The radar sensor has some performance limitations. If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicle's path, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 80 km/h (50 mph).

· The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions:
Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering the radar sensor.
Interference by other radar sources.
Snow or road spray from traveling vehicles.
If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g. motorcycle).
When driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.
· In some road or traffic conditions, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system may unexpectedly apply partial braking. When acceleration is necessary, continue to depress the accelerator pedal to override the system.
· Braking distances increase on slippery surfaces.

· The system is designed to automatically check the sensor's functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstructions of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly.
· Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

5-96 Starting and driving

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

LSD3834

Condition A:
In the following conditions, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light blinks and the system will be turned off automatically: · The radar sensor picks up interference
from another radar source. · The camera area of the windshield is
misted or frozen. · Strong light is shining from the front. · The cabin temperature is over approxi-
mately 104°F (40°C) in direct sunlight. · The camera area of the windshield glass
is continuously covered with dirt, etc.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system will resume automatically.
NOTE:
When the inside of the windshield on the camera area is misted or frozen, it will take a period of time to remove it after the A/C turns on. If dirt appears on this area, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Starting and driving 5-97

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
5-98 Starting and driving

Condition B:
When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system will automatically be canceled, the chime will sound and the "Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner's Manual" or "Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Manual" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
When the conditions listed above are no longer present, the warning message will no longer be available in the vehicle information display. If the "Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner's Manual" or "Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Manual" warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LSD3835

Condition C:
When the radar sensor of the front bumper is covered with mud, dirt, snow ice, etc., or is obstructed, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system will automatically be canceled. The chime will sound and the "Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner's Manual" or "Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Manual" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the "Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner's Manual" or "Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Manual" warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Condition D:
When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the "Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner's Manual" or "Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Manual" message.
Action to take:
When the above driving conditions no longer exist, turn the system back on.
NOTE: If the Intelligent Emergency Braking system stops working, the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system will also stop working.

LSD3862
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the Intelligent Emergency Braking system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display.

Starting and driving 5-99

Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the Intelligent Emergency Braking system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD3749
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The radar sensor OA is located on the front
of the vehicle.
To keep the Intelligent Emergency Braking system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:
· Always keep the sensor areas of the front bumper/emblem and windshield clean.
· Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensors (e.g., bumper, windshield).

5-100 Starting and driving

INTELLIGENT EMERGENCY BRAKING WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION (if so equipped)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system could result in serious injury or death.
· The Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for the driver's attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques.
· The Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions.
The Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system can assist the driver when there is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane or with a pedestrian ahead in the traveling lane.

LSD3756
The Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system uses a radar sensor located on the front of the vehicle
OB to measure the distance to the vehicle
ahead in the same lane. For pedestrians, the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system uses a camera
installed behind the windshield OA in addi-
tion to the radar sensor.

Starting and driving 5-101

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
INTELLIGENT EMERGENCY BRAKING WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM OPERATION
5-102 Starting and driving

LSD3793

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display

LSD3863

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
2. Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection emergency warning indicator
3. Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system warning light
The Intelligent Emergency Braking system operates at speeds above approximately 5 km/h (3 mph). For the pedestrian detection function, the system operates at speeds between 10 60 km/h (6 37 mph).
If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system will firstly provide the warning to the driver by flashing the vehicle ahead detection indicator (yellow) in the vehicle information display and providing an audible alert. If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully after the warning, and the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system detects that there is still the possibility of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force.

Starting and driving 5-103

If the driver does not take action, the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system issues the second visual (flashing) (red and white) and audible warning. If the driver releases the accelerator pedal, then the system applies partial braking. If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system applies harder braking automatically.
While the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system is operating, you may hear the sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system is operating properly.
NOTE:
The vehicle's brake lights come on when any braking is performed by the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system.

Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the consequences if a collision should be unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering wheel, accelerating or braking, the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system will function later or will not function.
The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions:
· When the steering wheel is turned to avoid a collision.
· When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
· When there is no longer a vehicle or a pedestrian detected ahead.
If the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes are released.

5-104 Starting and driving

TURNING THE INTELLIGENT
EMERGENCY BRAKING WITH
PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Emergency Brake" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Front" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

When the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system is turned off, the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:
· The Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display

LSD3841

Starting and driving 5-105

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
5-106 Starting and driving

· The Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system is integrated into the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system. When the Intelligent Emergency Braking system is turned off, the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system is also turned off.
INTELLIGENT EMERGENCY BRAKING WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

LSD3809

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
· The Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system cannot detect all vehicles or pedestrians under all conditions.

· The Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system does not detect the following objects:
Small pedestrians (including small children), animals and cyclists.
Pedestrians in wheelchairs or using mobile transport such as scooters, child-operated toys, or skateboards.
Pedestrians who are seated or otherwise not in a full upright standing or walking position.
Oncoming vehicles
Crossing vehicles
Obstacles on the roadside
· The Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system has some performance limitations.
If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicle's path, the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 80 km/h (50 mph).

For pedestrian detection, the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 60 km/h (37 mph) or below approximately 10 km/h (6 mph).
· The Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system will not function for pedestrians in darkness or in tunnels, even if there is street lighting in the area.
· The Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system may not function if the vehicle ahead is narrow (for example, a motorcycle).
· The Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system may not function if the speed difference between the two vehicles is too small.

· The radar sensor Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system may not function properly or detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions:
Poor visibility (conditions such as rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sandstorms, and road spray from other vehicles)
Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.
Driving on a bumpy road surface, such as an uneven dirt road.
If dirt, ice, snow or other material is covering the radar sensor area.
Interference by other radar sources.
The camera area of the windshield is fogged up, or covered with dirt, water drops, ice, snow, etc.
Strong light (for example, sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles) enters the front camera. Strong light causes the area around the pedestrian to be cast in a shadow, making it difficult to see.

Starting and driving 5-107

A sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or a shaded area or lightning flashes.)
The poor contrast of a person to the background, such as having clothing color or pattern which is similar to the background.
The pedestrian's profile is partially obscured or unidentifiable due to the pedestrian transporting luggage, wearing bulky or very loosefitting clothing or accessories.
· The system performance may degrade in the following conditions:
The vehicle is driven on a slippery road.
The vehicle is driven on a slope.
Excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the trunk room of your vehicle.

· The system is designed to automatically check the sensor's (radar and camera) functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect blockage of sensor areas covered by ice, snow or stickers, for example. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear sensor areas regularly.
· In some road and traffic conditions, the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system may unexpectedly apply partial braking. When acceleration is necessary, depress the accelerator pedal to override the system.
· Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

5-108 Starting and driving

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

LSD3795

Condition A:
In the following conditions, the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system warning light blinks and the system will be turned off automatically: · The radar sensor picks up interference
from another radar source. · The camera area of the windshield is
misted or frozen. · Strong light is shining from the front. · The cabin temperature is over approxi-
mately 40°C (104°F) in direct sunlight. · The camera area of the windshield glass
is continuously covered with dirt, etc.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist, the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system will resume automatically.
NOTE:
When the inside of the windshield on the camera area is misted or frozen, it will take a period of time to remove it after the A/C turns on. If dirt appears on this area, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Starting and driving 5-109

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
5-110 Starting and driving

LSD3835

Condition B:
When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system will automatically be canceled, the chime will sound and the "Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner's Manual" or "Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Manual" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
When the conditions listed above are no longer present, the warning message will no longer be available in the vehicle information display. If the "Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner's Manual" or "Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Manual" warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Condition C:
When the radar sensor of the front bumper is covered with mud, dirt, snow ice, etc., or is obstructed, the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system will automatically be canceled. The chime will sound and the "Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner's Manual" or "Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Manual" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the "Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner's Manual" or "Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Manual" warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Condition D:
When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the "Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner's Manual" or "Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Manual" message.
Action to take:
When the above driving conditions no longer exist, turn the system back on.
NOTE: If the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system stops working, the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system will also stop working.

LSD3862
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display.

Starting and driving 5-111

Action to take If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
5-112 Starting and driving

LSD3756
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The radar sensor is located on the front of
the vehicle OB . The camera is located on the upper side of the windshield OA .
To keep the Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:
· Always keep the sensor areas of the front bumper/emblem and windshield clean.
· Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensors (e.g., bumper, windshield).

· Do not cover or attach stickers, or install any accessory near the sensors. This could block sensor signals and/or cause failure or malfunction.
· Do not attach metallic objects near the radar sensor (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.
· Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's detection capability.
· Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper/emblem. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada
Model: ARS4B
IC: 4135A-ARS4B
FCC ID: OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Radio frequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements IC établies pour un environnement non contrôlé.
Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.
FCC Notice
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Starting and driving 5-113

INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (if so equipped)

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system could result in serious injury or death.
· The Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system can help warn the driver before a collision occurs but will not avoid a collision. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
The Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system can help alert the driver when there is a sudden braking of a second vehicle traveling in front of the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

LSD3749
The Intelligent Forward Collision Warning
system uses a radar sensor OA located on
the front of the vehicle to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

5-114 Starting and driving

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display

LSD3797

Starting and driving 5-115

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
2. Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection (if so equipped) system warning light

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
5-116 Starting and driving

LSD3798

INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM OPERATION
The Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system operates at speeds above approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
If there is a potential risk of a forward collision, the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system will warn the driver by blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator, and sounding an audible alert.

LSD2263
Starting and driving 5-117

LSD3841

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display

TURNING THE INTELLIGENT
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system ON or OFF.

5-118 Starting and driving

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Emergency Brake" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Front" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

When the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system is turned off, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:
· The Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.
· The Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system is integrated into the Intelligent Emergency Braking system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system. When the Intelligent Emergency Braking system is turned off, the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system is also turned off.

LSD2312
Illustration A
INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display

LSD3809

Starting and driving 5-119

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. · The Intelligent Forward Collision
Warning system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.
5-120 Starting and driving

Illustration B
· The radar sensor does not detect the following objects: Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in the roadway Oncoming vehicles Crossing vehicles
· (Illustration A) The Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system does not function when a vehicle ahead is a narrow vehicle, such as a motorcycle.

LSD2265
· The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions: Snow or heavy rain Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering the radar sensor. Interference by other radar sources. Snow or road spray from traveling vehicles. Driving in a tunnel (Illustration B) When the vehicle ahead is being towed.

(Illustration C) When the distance to the vehicle ahead is too close, the beam of the radar sensor is obstructed.
(Illustration D) When driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.
· The system is designed to automatically check the sensor's functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstruction of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly.
· Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-121

Illustration C
5-122 Starting and driving

LSD2266

Illustration D

LSD2313

Starting and driving 5-123

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
5-124 Starting and driving

LSD3795

Condition A:
When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system is automatically turned off.
When the above conditions no longer exist, the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system will resume automatically.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist, the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system will resume automatically.
Condition B:
When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system will automatically be canceled, the chime will sound and the "Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner's Manual" or "Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Manual" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display

LSD3796

Action to take:
When the conditions listed above are no longer present, the warning message will no longer be available in the vehicle information display. If the "Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner's Manual" or "Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Manual" warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Condition C:
When the radar sensor of the front bumper is covered with mud, dirt, snow ice, etc., or is obstructed, the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system will automatically be canceled. The chime will sound and the "Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner's Manual" or "Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Manual" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

Starting and driving 5-125

Action to take:
If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the "Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner's Manual" or "Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Manual" warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Condition D:
When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the "Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Owner's Manual" or "Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked: See Manual" message.
Action to take:
When the above driving conditions no longer exist, turn the system back on.

NOTE: If the Intelligent Emergency Braking system stops working, the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system will also stop working.

LSD3862
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the Intelligent Emergency Braking system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display.

5-126 Starting and driving

Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the Intelligent Forward Collision Warning system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD3749
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sensor OA is located on the front of the
vehicle.
To keep the system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:
· Always keep the sensor area of the front bumper/emblem clean.
· Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor.
· Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction.

· Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.
· Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper/emblem. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
FCC Notice
For USA
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Starting and driving 5-127

INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (if so equipped)

For Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Intelligent Driver Alertness system could result in serious injury or death.
· The Intelligent Driver Alertness system is only a warning to inform the driver of a potential lack of driver attention or drowsiness. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control.
· The Intelligent Driver Alertness system does not detect and provide an alert of the driver's lack of attention or fatigue in every situation.
· It is the driver's responsibility to: stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, be in control of the vehicle at all times, avoid driving when tired, avoid distractions (texting, etc).

The Intelligent Driver Alertness system helps alert the driver if the system detects a lack of attention or driving fatigue.
The system monitors driving style and steering behavior over a period of time, and it detects changes from the normal pattern. If the system detects that driver attention is decreasing over a period of time, the system uses audible and visual warnings to suggest that the driver take a break.

5-128 Starting and driving

The system resets and starts reassessing driving style and steering behavior when the ignition switch is cycled from the ON to the OFF position and back to the ON position.

LSD3844
For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS SYSTEM OPERATION

LSD4085
For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display
If the system detects driver fatigue or that driver attention is decreasing, the message "Take a break?" appears in the vehicle information display and a chime sounds when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 60 km/h (37 mph).
The system continuously monitors driver attention and can provide multiple warnings per trip.

Starting and driving 5-129

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the Intelligent Driver Alertness system.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Driver Attention Alert" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

NOTE: The setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS SYSTEM
5-130 Starting and driving

LSD3846

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display

LSD3954

INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the Intelligent Driver Alertness system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. · The Intelligent Driver Alertness sys-
tem may not operate properly and may not provide an alert in the following conditions: Poor road conditions such as an
uneven road surface or pot holes. Strong side wind. If you have adopted a sporty driving
style with higher cornering speeds or higher rates of acceleration. Frequent lane changes or changes to vehicle speed. · The Intelligent Driver Alertness system will not provide an alert in the following conditions: Vehicle speeds lower than 60 km/h (37 mph). Short lapses of attention. Instantaneous distractions such as dropping an object.
Starting and driving 5-131

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

LSD4086
System malfunction
If the Intelligent Driver Alertness system malfunctions, the system warning message will appear in the vehicle information display and the function will be stopped automatically.

Action to take
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the system warning message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION
During the first 2,000 km (1,200 miles), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance.
· Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.
· Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
· Avoid quick starts. · Avoid hard braking as much as possible. · Do not tow a trailer for the first 800 km
(500 miles). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

5-132 Starting and driving

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

WARNING
· Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

SSD0488
· Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park) for CVT models or in an appropriate gear for MT models. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.
· Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended.

Starting and driving 5-133

TOWING A TRAILER

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.
5-134 Starting and driving

Follow the information below if you need to tow your vehicle.
FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.
CAUTION
· Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage.
· Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.
· Never tow your front wheel drive vehicle with the front tires on the ground. Doing so may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain.
· DO NOT tow any Continuously Variable Transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication.
· For additional information, see "Towing your vehicle" (P. 6-12).

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)
To tow a vehicle equipped with a CVT, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle's drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.
Manual Transmission (M/T) (if so equipped)
· Always tow with the M/T in Neutral.
· After towing 805 km (500 mi), start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after every 805 km (500 mi) of towing may cause damage to internal transmission parts.

POWER STEERING

BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING
· If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate.
· When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering. You will still have control of the vehicle, but the steering will be harder to operate. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The power steering system is designed to provide power assist while driving to operate the steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or continuously while parking or driving at a very low speed, the power assist for the steering wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent overheating of the power steering system and protect it from getting damaged. While the power assist is reduced, steering wheel operation will become heavy. When the temperature of the power steering system goes down, the power assist level will return to normal. Avoid repeating such steering wheel op-

erations that could cause the power steering system to overheat.
You may hear a noise when the steering wheel is operated quickly. However, this is not a malfunction.
If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering, but you will still have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steering effort is required to operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.
For additional information, see "Power steering warning light" (P. 2-14).

The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at two wheels.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping distance will be longer.
Using the brakes
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.
Starting and driving 5-135

WARNING
· While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident.
· If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.
Wet brakes
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly.
Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the brake shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best brake performance.
5-136 Starting and driving

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
WARNING
· The ABS is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety.
· Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness.
When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels.
When installing a spare tire, make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the tire placard. For additional information, see "Tire placard" (P. 9-10).
For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 8-29).

Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The Anti-lock Braking System will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.
Self-test feature
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) includes electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the selftest occurs, you may hear a "clunk" noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM

instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally but without anti-lock assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Normal operation
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) operates at speeds above 5 - 10 km/h (3 - 6 mph). The speed varies according to road conditions.
When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.

BRAKE ASSIST
WARNING
The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

WARNING

· The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.

· Do not modify the vehicle's suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deterio-

rated, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly. This could adversely af-

fect vehicle handling performance,

and the

indicator light may flash

or illuminate.

· If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC sys-

tem may not operate properly and

the

indicator light may

illuminate.

Starting and driving 5-137

CHASSIS CONTROL (if so equipped)

· If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the cator light may illuminate.

indi-

· When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly and the

indicator

light may flash or illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads.

· When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the

indicator light may

flash or illuminate. This is not a mal-

function. Restart the engine after

driving onto a stable surface.

· If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are

used, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly and the

indicator

light may flash or illuminate.

· The VDC system is not a substitute

for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
During braking while driving through turns, the system optimizes the distribution of force to each of the front and rear wheels depending on the radius of the turn.

5-138 Starting and driving

The chassis control is an electric control module that includes the following functions: · Intelligent Trace Control · Intelligent Ride Control
INTELLIGENT TRACE CONTROL (if so equipped)
This system senses driving based on the driver's steering and acceleration/braking patterns, and controls brake pressure at individual wheels to aid tracing at corners and help smooth vehicle response.
The Intelligent Trace Control can be set to on (enabled) or off (disabled) through the vehicle information display "Settings" page. For additional information, see "Settings" (P. 2-18) or (P. 2-34).
When the VDC system is turned off, the Intelligent Trace Control is also turned off.
WARNING
The Intelligent Trace Control may not be effective depending on the driving condition. Always drive carefully and attentively.

When the Intelligent Trace Control is operating, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise. This is normal and indicates that the Intelligent Trace Control is operating properly.
Even if the Intelligent Trace Control is turned off, some functions will remain on to assist the driver (for example, avoidance scenes).
INTELLIGENT RIDE CONTROL (if so equipped)
This system senses upper body motion (based on wheel speed information) and controls engine torque and four wheel brake pressure. This will enhance ride comfort in effort to restrain uncomfortable upper body movement when passing over undulated road surfaces. This system comes into effect above 40 km/h (25 mph).
When the VDC system is turned off, the Intelligent Ride Control is also turned off.
When the Intelligent Ride Control is operating, you may hear noise and sense slight deceleration. This is normal and indicates that the Intelligent Ride Control is operating properly.

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM

FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM (if so equipped)

WARNING
· Never rely solely on the hill start assist system to prevent the vehicle from moving backward on a hill. Always drive carefully and attentively. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be especially careful when stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.
· The hill start assist system is not designed to hold the vehicle at a standstill on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll backwards and may result in a collision or serious personal injury.
· The hill start assist system may not prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury.

When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill start assist system automatically keeps the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle from rolling backward in the time it takes the driver to release the brake pedal and apply the accelerator.
The hill start assist system will operate automatically under the following conditions:
· The transmission is shifted to a forward or reverse gear.
· The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill by applying the brake. The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and the hill start assist system will stop operating completely.

The sonar (parking sensor) system sounds a tone to inform the driver of obstacles near the bumper.
When the "DISPLAY" key is ON, the sonar view will automatically appear in the meter.
WARNING
· The sonar (parking sensor) system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper parking.
· The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers. Always look around and check that it is safe to do so before parking.
· Read and understand the limitations of the sonar (parking sensor) system as contained in this section. The colors of the corner sonar indicator and the distance guide lines in the front/ rear view indicate different distances to the object.
· Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.

Starting and driving 5-139

· This function is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle.
· The system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. Always move slowly. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground.
· The system may not detect the following objects: fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc., and thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc., or wedge-shaped objects.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
CAUTION
· Excessive noise (such as audio system volume or an open vehicle window) will interfere with the tone and it may not be heard.

· Keep the sonar sensors (located on the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects. If the sensors are covered, the accuracy of the sonar function will be diminished.

SYSTEM OPERATION
The system informs with a visual and audible alert of front obstacles when the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and both front and rear obstacles when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

Sonar Operation Table

FR Sensor

RR Sensor

Range Sound Display Sound Display

o Display/Beep when detect

Display on camera view

x No Display and Beep

The system is deactivated at speeds above 10 km/h (6 mph). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
While the vehicle is moving the audible alert will stop after 3 seconds when an obstacle is detected by only the corner sensor and distance does not change. The audible alert will also stop when the obstacle moves away from the vehicle. At any time the left side button of the steering wheel (
buttons) is available to cancel the audible alert.
When the object is detected, the indicator (green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate of the blinking increases. When the vehicle is very close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns red, and the tone sounds continuously.

5-140 Starting and driving

LSD2428
When the corner of the vehicle moves closer to an object, the corner sonar indi-
cator OA appears.

LSD2137
The system indicators OA will appear when
the vehicle moves closer to an object.

Starting and driving 5-141

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the sonar system:

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display:

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Parking Aids" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Front sensor" or "Rear sensor" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.
Select "Display" to display the parking sensor in the vehicle information display when the sonar system activates.
Select "Range" to change the sonar system distance to "Long," "Medium" or "Short."
Select "Volume" to change the volume to "High," "Medium" or "Low"

LSD4070

For vehicles with the 7 inch meter display

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

The system is automatically activated

FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM when the ignition is in the ON position and

the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

5-142 Starting and driving

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display

For vehicles with the 4.2 inch meter display:

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select "Driver As-

sistance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Parking Aids" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Rear Sensor" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

4. Select "Front Sensor" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.
Select "Display" to display the parking sensor in the vehicle information display when the sonar system activates.
Select "Distance" to change the sonar system distance to "Long," "Medium" or "Short."
Select "Volume" to change the volume to "High," "Medium" or "Low"

LSD4083

Starting and driving 5-143

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole, or use the remote keyless entry key fob or the NISSAN Intelligent Key®.
ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 0°C (32°F), check the antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information, see "Engine cooling system" (P. 8-6).
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. The vehicle is equipped with a sealed maintenance free battery. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For additional information, see "Changing engine coolant" (P. 8-7).
TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
3. Tire chains may be used. For additional information, see "Tire chains" (P. 8-32).
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter: · A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-
move ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades. · A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support. · A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. · Extra washer fluid to refill the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.

5-144 Starting and driving

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
· Wet ice (0°C, 32°F and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or "grip" under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.
· Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction.
· Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement.
· Allow greater following distances on slippery roads.

· Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers.
· Do not use the cruise control (if so equipped) on slippery roads.
· Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.

PARKING BRAKE
WARNING
· (For CVT vehicles)
· When parking in an area where the outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), the parking brake, if applied may freeze in place and may be difficult to release. For safe parking, it is recommended that you place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and securely block the wheels.
· (For M/T vehicles)
· When parking in an area where the outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), the parking brake, if applied may freeze in place and may be difficult to release. For safe parking, it is recommended that you place the shift lever in the 1 (1st) or R (Reverse) position and securely block the wheels.

Starting and driving 5-145

MEMO
5-146 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

The flashers will operate with the ignition switch in any position.
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following procedure:
· Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch three consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or
· Push and hold the push-button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.

LIC0394
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.
WARNING
· If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road.
· Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic.
· Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.
6-2 In case of emergency

FLAT TIRE

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (if so equipped)
This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light (if so equipped) is lit and the "Tire Pressure Low Add Air" warning (if so equipped) appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 25 km/h (16 mph). For additional information, see "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" (P. 2-7), and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (if so equipped)" (P. 5-5).
WARNING
· Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.

· If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the tire placard to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

· When using a wheel without TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately one minute. The light will remain on after one minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.
· Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
· Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below:
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

In case of emergency 6-3

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Shift the manual transmission into R (Reverse) or the Continuously Variable Transmission into P (Park).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING
· Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into R (Reverse), or the Continuously Variable Transmission into P (Park).
· Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous.
· Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

LCE2142
A. Blocks
B. Flat tire
Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.

LCE2449
Getting the spare tire and tools
1. Open the trunk and lift the trunk floor carpeting.
2. Jack is located beside of the spare tire. To remove, take off the rubber strap and lift out.
3. Lift spacer to access the clamp.

6-4 In case of emergency

To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod
O1 as illustrated. Apply cloth O2 between the wheel and jack
rod to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.
Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or wheel surface.

LCE2450
4. Turn the clamp counterclockwise and remove to release the spare tire.
CAUTION
Avoid touching the sheet metal area around the spare tire. Doing so could result in personal injury.

SCE0630
Removing wheel cover (if so equipped)
CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel caps or wheel covers. Doing so could result in personal injury.

In case of emergency 6-5

CE1089
Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire
WARNING
· Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
· Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change.
6-6 In case of emergency

· Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.
· Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary.
· Never use blocks on or under the jack.
· Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials.
· Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack.
· Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move.

Always refer to the illustrations for the correct placement and jack-up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type.
Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions.
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground.

SCE0002
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. Align the jack head between the two notches in the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown.
The jack should be used on firm and level ground.
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the tire.

WCE0056
Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency use. For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 8-29).
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the
sequence illustrated (OA , OB , OC , OD , OE )
until they are tight.

In case of emergency 6-7

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated
(OA , OB , OC , OD , OE ). Lower the vehicle
completely.
WARNING
· Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident.
· Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose.
· Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque: 113 N·m (83 ft-lbs.)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each lubrication interval.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for 3 hours or more or driven less than 1.6 km (1 mile).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire placard.
After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD tire pressure, the display of the tire pressure information may show higher pressure than the COLD tire pressure after the vehicle has been driven more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
This is because the tire pressurizes as the tire temperature rises. This does not indicate a system malfunction.
5. Securely store the flat tire in the vehicle.

LCE2451
6. Install the jack in its storage area and secure with rubber strap.
7. Place the trunk floor carpeting over the damaged tire.
8. Close the trunk.

6-8 In case of emergency

JUMP STARTING

WARNING
· Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.
· The spare tire is designed for emergency use. For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 8-29).

To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed.
WARNING
· If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle.
· Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery.
· Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water.
· Keep battery out of the reach of children.
· The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.

· Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting.
· Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.
· Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.

In case of emergency 6-9

WARNING
Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their batteries near each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

LCE2223
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P (Park) (Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).
3. Place the ignition switch to the LOCK or OFF position.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the se-
quence illustrated (OA , OB , OC , OD ).

CAUTION
· Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative (-) to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) -- not to the battery.
· Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable.

6-10 In case of emergency

PUSH STARTING

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

CAUTION
· Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing the vehicle.
· Three-way catalyst equipped modeled should not be started by pushing. Attempting to do so may cause damage to the three-way catalyst.
· Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models and Manual Transmission (M/T) cannot be push-started or tow-started. Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage.
· For Manual Transmission (M/T) models, never try to start the vehicle by towing it. When the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the following steps.
WARNING
· Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire.
· To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is still hot. When the coolant reservoir cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury.
· Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P (Park) (CVT).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. (If steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen.
4. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time.

In case of emergency 6-11

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir with the engine running. Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir, if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When towing your vehicle, local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions:

For additional information about towing your vehicle behind a Recreational Vehicle (RV), see "Flat towing" (P. 5-134)
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN
NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle based upon the type of drivetrain. For additional information, refer to the diagrams in this section to ensure that your vehicle is properly towed.

WARNING
· Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed.
· Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.

6-12 In case of emergency

CAUTION
· When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any of these conditions apply, dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used.
· Always attach safety chains before towing.

Two-Wheel Drive models with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

LCE2345
CAUTION
· Never tow CVT models with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels.

· When towing CVT models with the rear wheels on the ground or on towing dollies:
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism (for models with a steering lock mechanism).

In case of emergency 6-13

Two-Wheel Drive models with manual transmission
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be used when towing your vehicle or place the vehicle on the flatbed truck as illustrated.
If you must use a pull behind tow truck put the manual transmission in N (Neutral).
Your vehicle speed should never exceed 97 km/h (60 mph) when towing your vehicle. After towing 805 km (500 mi), start and idle the engine with the transmission in N (Neutral) for two minutes. Failure to idle the en-
6-14 In case of emergency

LCE2346
gine after every 805 km (500 mi) of towing may cause damage to the transmission's internal parts.
CAUTION
Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage. · If you have to tow manual transmis-
sion models with the rear wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing dollies) or four wheels on the ground: Always release the parking brake. Move the transmission shift lever
to the N (Neutral) position

Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances for manual transmission models only: Speed: Below 97 km/h (60 mph) Distance: Less than 805 km (500 mi)
When towing long distances or speeds in excess of 97 km/h (60 mph), remove the propeller shaft before towing to prevent damage to the transmission. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information.
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when recovering a stuck vehicle: · Contact a professional towing ser-
vice to recover the vehicle if you have any questions regarding the recovery procedure. · Tow chains or cables must be attached only to main structural members of the vehicle.

· Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow or free a stuck vehicle.
· Only use devices specifically designed for vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturer's instructions.
· Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull at an angle.
· Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle except the attachment point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer's instructions for the recovery device.
Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
· Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. · Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) System.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward. · Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive) (Continuously Variable Transmission models) or 1st (Low) and R (Reverse) (manual transmission models). · Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion. · Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R (Reverse) and D (Drive) (Continuously Variable Transmission models) or 1st (Low) and R (Reverse) (manual transmission models). · Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-15

MEMO
6-16 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 7-2
Cleaning interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Power moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

CLEANING EXTERIOR

WASHING
CAUTION
· Do not concentrate water spray directly on the sonar sensors (if so equipped) on the bumper as this will result in damage to the sensors. Do not use pressure washers capable of spraying water over 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi ) to wash your vehicle. Use of high-pressure washers over 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result in damage to or removal of paint or graphics. Avoid using a high-pressure washer closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to the vehicle. Always use a wide-angle nozzle only, keep the nozzle moving and do not concentrate the water spray on any one area.
· Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not to function properly. Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used.
7-2 Appearance and care

· Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.
· Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted.
· Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged.
GLASS
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defogger elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so equipped)
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels: · Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels. · Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as ambient temperature. · Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied.

CLEANING INTERIOR

WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.
CAUTION
· Never use benzine, thinner or any similar material.
· Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather's natural finish.
· Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.
· Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.

POWER MOONROOF (if so equipped)
CAUTION
To help prevent damaging the moonroof while cleaning:
· Do not rub the material with a cloth. Doing so can damage the surface of the material or cause a stain to spread.
· Never use benzine, thinner or any similar chemical to clean the sunshade. This may discolor the moonroof and damage the surface.
· Clean water based stains by patting the surface with a clean soft cloth dampened in warm water. Press a clean dry cloth onto the surface to remove as much dampness as possible and then let air dry.
· Clean oil based stains by patting the surface with a clean soft cloth dampened in warm water. Press a clean dry cloth onto the surface to remove as much dampness as possible and then let air dry.

FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision, injury or death: · NEVER place a floor mat on top of
another floor mat in the driver front position. · Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats specifically designed for use in your vehicle model. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information. · Properly position the mats in the floorwell using the floor mat positioning aid.
SEAT BELTS
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

Appearance and care 7-3

CORROSION PROTECTION
PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION
CAUTION · NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-
bris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom. · Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.
7-4 Appearance and care

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Changing engine oil and oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) (if so equipped) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Clutch (if so equipped) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Air conditioner filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 Front side marker (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Replacing the LED fog light bulb (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Replacing the fog light bulb (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33 Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

It is the owner's responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed.
Scheduled maintenance
For your convenience, both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in a separate maintenance booklet.
General maintenance
General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-to-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation.
Where to go for service
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and corrected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer do it promptly.
When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the "Maintenance precautions" in this section.
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
WARNING
Failure to follow the procedures listed within this section may result in personal injury.
Additional information on the following items with " * " is found in this section.
Outside the vehicle
Doors and hood Check that all doors and the hood operate smoothly as well as the back door, trunk lid and hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.

When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Check that the gas stays or struts properly and securely hold the hood, trunk, or rear hatch in a fully open position. If the hood, trunk, or rear hatch is not held open, have the gas stays or struts replaced.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) tire pressure sensor (if so equipped) It is recommended that you replace the TPMS tire pressure sensor assembly when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed.
Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Repair as necessary.

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.
Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Steering wheel Check for changes in the steering condition, such as excessive play, hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes Make sure that all warning lights and chimes are operating properly.
Windshield defogger Check that the air comes out of the defogger outlets properly and in good quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak. Replace as necessary.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately.

WARNING
· Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. For manual transmission models, move the shift lever to N (Neutral). For Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models, move the shift lever to P (Park).
· Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs.
· If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts.
· It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.
· Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle.
· If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

· Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
· Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery.
· Because the fuel lines on gasoline engine models are under high pressure even when the engine is off, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines.
· Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan.

CAUTION
· Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down.
· Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.
· Never leave the engine or the transmission related component harness connector disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
· Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

2.0L 4 cylinder (MR20DD engine model) 1. Engine oil filler 2. Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
reservoir 3. Fuse and relay box 4. Battery 5. Air cleaner 6. Engine oil dipstick 7. Drive belt location 8. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir 9. Engine coolant reservoir
LDI3477
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

WARNING
· Never remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. For additional information on precautions, see "If your vehicle overheats" (P. 6-11)
· The coolant reservoir is equipped with a pressure type coolant reservoir cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a Genuine NISSAN coolant reservoir cap.
CAUTION
· Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer. Additives may clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system.
· When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant or equivalent in its quality with the proper mixture ratio. Examples of the mixture ratio are shown below:

CAUTION
The use of other types of coolant solutions or coolant colors may damage the engine cooling system.

Outside temperature

°C

°F

> -15

-15

Genuine

NISSAN Engine Cool-
ant or equivalent in its qual-

Demineralized water or distilled
water

ity

30%

70%

50%

LDI3495
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant
level is below the MIN level OB , add coolant to the MAX level OA .
This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 168,000 km (105,000 miles) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ENGINE OIL

non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer to a separate maintenance booklet.
If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information on the location of the engine coolant reservoir, see "Engine compartment check locations" (P. 8-5).
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

WARNING
· To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
· Never remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the system.
· Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
· Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets.

LDI3487
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

LDI0371
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H
(High) and L (Low) marks OB . This is the
normal operating oil level range. If the oil
level is below the L (Low) mark OA , re-
move the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not
overfill OC .
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

CAUTION
· Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.
· It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.
Make sure to follow the engine oil changing intervals in the maintenance booklet. Operating under the following conditions may require more frequent oil change: · repeated short distance driving · driving in dusty conditions · stop and go commuting.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
For additional information on engine oil and oil filter change, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.

Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for 15 minutes.
4. Raise and support the vehicle using a suitable floor jack and safety jack stands.
· Place the safety jack stands under the vehicle jack-up points.
· A suitable adapter should be attached to the jack stand saddle.
CAUTION
Make sure the correct lifting and support points are used to avoid vehicle damage.
Removal of under-engine protector
1. Remove fasteners and under-engine protector.

Engine oil and filter
1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug and oil filter.
2. Remove the oil filler cap.
3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot.
WARNING
· Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
· Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
· Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.
4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the engine. Failure to do so could lead to an oil leak and engine damage. · The dipstick must be inserted in
place to prevent oil spillage from the dipstick hole when filling the engine with oil.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil.
7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten additionally more than 2/3 turn.
Oil filter tightening torque: 14.7 to 20.6 N·m (11 to 15 ft-lb)
8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
Drain plug tightening torque: 29.4 to 39.2 N·m (22 to 29 ft-lb)

9. Refill the engine with the recommended oil through the oil filler opening, and install the oil filler cap securely.
For additional information about drain and refill capacity, see "Recommended fluids/ lubricants and capacities" (P. 9-2). The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine the proper amount of oil in the engine.
10. Start the engine and check for leakage around the drain plug and the oil filter. Correct as required. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.
After the operation
1. Reinstall under-engine protector in reverse order of removal.
2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.

3. Reset oil and oil filter maintenance reminder or oil control system (if so equipped). For additional information, see "Vehicle information display 4.2 inch (11 cm) Type A" (P. 2-17) or "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type B" (P. 2-32).
· Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.
· Check your local regulations.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so equipped) FLUID
CAUTION
· Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3. Do not mix with other fluids.
· Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the warranty.

BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped) FLUID

For additional information on brake fluid specification, see "Recommended fluids/ lubricants and capacities" (P. 9-2).
WARNING
· Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch (if so equipped) systems. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake and clutch system and affect the vehicle's stopping ability.
· Clean the filler cap before removing. · Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous
and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children.
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water.

BRAKE FLUID
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CLUTCH (if so equipped) FLUID
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. The brake fluid reservoir is shared with the clutch hydraulic system for manual transmissions. If the level is below the CL (clutch) line, add Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the mixture ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent.

LDI3496
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid when the "Low Washer Fluid" warning message (if so equipped) shows on the vehicle information display.
To check the fluid level, use your finger to
plug the center hole O1 of the cap/tube
assembly, then remove it from the reservoir. If there is no fluid in the tube, add fluid.

CAUTION
· Do not substitute engine antifreeze coolant for windshield-washer fluid. This may result in damage to the paint.
· Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

· Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer's recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11

BATTERY

Caution symbols for battery

WARNING

No smoking, No exposed flames, No Do not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by the

Sparks

battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

Shield eyes

Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or battery acid.

Keep away from children

Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can

cause blindness or severe burns. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your

Battery acid

eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately

flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the bat-

tery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.

Note operating instructions

Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.

Explosive gas

Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

· If the battery is labeled "do not open" it is maintenance free and battery fluid should not be checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or a qualified specialist workshop to confirm the battery's performance.
· Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water.
· Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened.
· If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING
· Do not expose the battery to flames, an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
· When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry.
· Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
· Keep battery out of the reach of children.
· Do not tip the battery.

NOTE:

LDI3302

Do not try to open the top of the battery.
This battery is not equipped with removable vent caps.

JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see "Jump starting" (P. 6-9). If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM

DRIVE BELT

CAUTION
· Do not ground accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely.
· Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is in poor condition, have it replaced or adjusted. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for condition.

WDI0638
1. Automatic tensioner pulley 2. Generator pulley 3. Water pump pulley 4. Air conditioner compressor pulley 5. Crankshaft pulley
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt. The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

SPARK PLUGS

AIR CLEANER
CAUTION Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.

SDI1895
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace iridium-
tipped OA spark plugs as frequently as con-
ventional type spark plugs because they last much longer.
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

LDI3498
The air cleaner filter may be cleaned an reused. Replace it according to the maintenance log shown in a separate maintenance booklet. To remove the air cleaner filter:
1. Unlatch the retaining clips OA . 2. Pull up at points OB and remove.
3. Pull up and remove air cleaner housing.
4. Remove the air cleaner filter. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover with a damp cloth, then replace air cleaner filter.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

NOTE:
After installing a new air cleaner, make sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the housing and latch the clips.
WARNING
· Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops the flame if the engine backfires. If it isn't there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed.
· Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.
AIR CONDITIONER FILTER
If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the windshieldwasher or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, install new windshield wiper blades.
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision.

REPLACING

LDI2757

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

To replace the windshield wiper blades, follow the procedure below:

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
2. Push the release tab OB . 3. Move the wiper blade OA down and
remove.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place.

5. Push wiper on to windshield.

BRAKES

CAUTION
· After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened.
· Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.
The front and rear (if so equipped) disctype brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied. The rear drum-type brakes (if so equipped) self-adjust every time the parking brake is applied.

WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI2731
If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle
OD . This may cause clogging or improper
windshield-washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or
small pin OC .

Brake pad wear indicators
Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

FUSES

The rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators. Should you ever hear an usually loud noise from the rear drum brakes, have them checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional information regarding brake inspections, refer to the appropriate maintenance schedule information in a separate maintenance booklet.

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
Fuses are used in the passenger compartment and engine compartment. Spare fuses are provided and can be found in the passenger compartment fuse box.
When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with all fuses listed on the fuse label.

8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

LDI3511

CAUTION
Never use a fuse of higher and lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover.
If any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing
the tab OA and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller, which is located in the center of the fuse box cover in the passenger compartment. For additional information, see "Passenger compartment" (P. 8-20).

Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.

LDI2746
5. If the fuse is open OB , replace it with an equivalent good fuse OC .
6. Push the fuse box cover to install. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. NOTE: Your vehicle may not be equipped with all fuses listed on the fuse label.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
NOTE:
The fuse box is located on the driver's side of the instrument panel.

LDI3483
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.
2. Remove the fuse box cover OA with a
suitable tool. Use a cloth to avoid damaging the trim.
3. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller OB ,
which is located in the center of the fuse box cover in the passenger compartment.

LDI3481
5. If the fuse is open OC , replace it with an equivalent good fuse OD .
6. Push the fuse box cover to install.
If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with all fuses listed on the fuse label.

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

BATTERY REPLACEMENT
CAUTION Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts.

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as follows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver OA into the slit OB of the corner and twist it
to separate the upper part from the lower part. Place a cloth over the screwdriver to protect the casing.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2032 or equivalent.
· Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction.
· Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity.
· Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of the lower part.

LDI2001
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

LIGHTS

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with
OC and OD .
5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.
If you need assistance with replacement, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Low power radio frequency devices: Manufacturer: Continental AG Country of origin: Germany Carrier frequency: 433.92 MHz Rated supply voltage and power
source: 3V lithium battery
The operation of this equipment is subject to the following two conditions: (1) it is possible that this equipment or device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this equipment or device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

HEADLIGHTS
For additional information on headlight bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.

LDI2637
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

LDI3512
Type A (if so equipped)
Replacing the halogen headlight bulb (if so equipped)
CAUTION
· Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

· Do not leave the headlight assembly open without a bulb installed for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering the headlight body may affect bulb performance. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly just before a replacement bulb is installed.
· Only touch the base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could significantly affect bulb life and/or headlight performance.
· High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped.
· Use the same number and wattage as shown in the chart.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the electrical connector.
3. Rotate the high beam bulb OA counter-
clockwise and remove bulb.
4. Rotate the low beam bulb OB counter-
clockwise and remove bulb.
Reverse instructions to install bulbs.

WARNING
Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
CAUTION
· Do not touch glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to bulb.
· Do not leave the bulb out of the lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture, smoke, etc. may affect the performance of the lamp.
· Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23

Replacing the LED headlight bulb (if so equipped)
If LED headlight bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
FRONT SIDE MARKER (if so equipped)
If LED side marker bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
REPLACING THE LED FOG LIGHT BULB (if so equipped)
If LED fog light bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI3513
REPLACING THE FOG LIGHT BULB (if so equipped)
CAUTION
· High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped.
· When handling the bulb, do not touch the glass envelope.
· Use the same number and wattage as originally installed as shown in the chart.

· Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light for a long period of time as dust, moisture and smoke may enter the fog light body and affect the performance of the fog light.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Access to the fog light is behind the fascia and in front of the tire.
3. Remove the fasteners OA ; carefully pull
back the front fender protector.
4. Disconnect harness.

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

LDI3514
5. Rotate the bulb OB counterclockwise
and pull out to remove.
6. Remove by pulling straight off the fog light.
Reverse instructions to install bulb.

Item
Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped) Low (Halogen) High (Halogen) Turn/Park Side marker*
Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped) Low* High* Daytime running* Park* Side marker* Turn
Headlight assembly (Type C) (if so equipped) Low * High * Turn Daytime running* Park*
Headlight assembly (Type D) (if so equipped) Low (Halogen) High (Halogen) Turn Clearance
Front fog light (Type A) (if so equipped) Front fog light (Type B) (if so equipped)* Front fog light (Type C) (if so equipped)
Fog light Daytime running light Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)* Map lights* Room light Trunk light * High-mounted stop light* Backup (reversing) assembly* Backup (reversing) Tail Rear combination light* Turn Stop/Tail License plate light*

Wattage (W)
55 65 27/7 --
-- -- -- -- -- 27/7
-- -- 21 -- --
55 65 21 5 35 --
35 21 -- 5 8 8 3.4 --
16 5
21 21/5
--

Bulb No.
H11 H9 3457 NAK --
-- -- -- -- -- 3457 NAK
-- -- WY21W -- --
H11 H9 WY21W W5W H8 --
H8 W21W
-- W5W W8W W8W 158
--
W16W W5W
WY21W W21/5W
--

* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for assistance.
Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

1. Map light 2. Room light 3. Door mirror turn signal light (if so
equipped) 4. Headlight assembly 5. Fog light (if so equipped) 6. High-mount stop light 7. Trunk light 8. License plate light 9. Backup (reversing) assembly 10. Rear combination light

LDI3548
8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WDI0306
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, light and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation

LDI2135
Trunk light (if so equipped)

LDI3567
Replacing the rear combination light bulbs
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the fasteners O1 , O2 , O3 and
carefully pull back the carpet.
3. Remove the nuts and pull out the rear combination light.

LDI3516
Rear combination light
4. Rotate the turn signal bulb socket OB
counterclockwise and remove.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket.
6. Rotate the stop/tail light bulb socket OC
counterclockwise and remove.
7. Remove the bulb from the socket.
Reverse steps to install bulbs.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27

Replacing the license plate light
If license plate light bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI3517
Replacing the backup (reversing) assembly light bulbs
1. Remove the fasteners OA and carefully
pull back the carpet.
2. Remove the nuts and pull out the backup (reversing) assembly light.

LDI3518
Backup (reversing) assembly
3. Rotate the tail bulb socket OC counter-
clockwise and remove.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket.
5. Rotate the reversing bulb socket OB
counterclockwise and remove.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket.
Reverse steps to install bulbs.

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WHEELS AND TIRES

If you have a flat tire, see "Flat tire" (P. 6-3).
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (if so equipped)
WARNING
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If equipped, the system also displays pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel.
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 25 km/h (16 mph). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving).

For additional information, see "Low tire pressure warning light" (P. 2-12), "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5) and "Flat tire" (P. 6-3).
Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including the spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the tire placard under the "Cold Tire Inflation Pressure" heading. The tire placard is affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularly because:
· Most tires naturally lose air over time.
· Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking.
The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours or driven less than 1.6 km (1 mile) at moderate speeds.
The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert (if so equipped) provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle for inflating the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure. For additional information, see "TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert" (P. 5-8).

Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
· Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident.
· Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29

has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1.6 km (1 mile) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear and vehicle handling characteristics based on the vehicle's GVWR.

LDI3358
Tire placard
A Tire size: The size of the tires originally
installed on the vehicle at the factory.
B Tire pressure: Inflate the tires to this
pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle
8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Checking tire pressure

LDI0393

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specification shown on the Tire Placard.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires, including the spare.

Size
Front Original Tire: 205/60R16
215/50R17
215/45R18

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
230 kPa, 2.3 bar, 33 psi, 230 kPa, 2.3 bar, 33 psi 230 kPa, 2.3 bar, 33 psi

Size Rear Original Tire: 205/60R16 205/60R16 215/50R17 215/50R17 215/45R18 215/45R18
Spare Tire: T125/70D16

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
210 kPa, 2.1 bar, 30 psi 230 kPa, 2.3 bar, 33 psi 210 kPa, 2.1 bar, 30 psi 230 kPa, 2.3 bar, 33 psi 210 kPa, 2.1 bar, 30 psi 230 kPa, 2.3 bar, 33psi
420 kPa, 4.2 bar, 60 psi

TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
· When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability.
· Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
· Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which can cause the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system to malfunction resulting in personal injury or death, excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission and differential gears.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance all year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating "M&S" on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some states, provinces and territories prohibit their use. Check local laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of nonstudded snow tires.
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION
Tire chains/cables can be installed on 205/60R16, 215/50R17 and 215/45R18 size tires.
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufac-

turer's suggestions. Use only SAE class "S" chains. Class "S" chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class "S" chains are designed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tires. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on the front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress.

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval.

WDI0258
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 10,000 km (6,000 miles).
For additional information on tire replacing procedures, see "Flat tire" (P. 6-3).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque: 113 N·m (83 ft-lbs.)

WARNING
· After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure.
· Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 1,000 km (600 miles) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).
· Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.

Tire wear and damage
1. Wear indicator 2. Location mark

WDI0259

WARNING
· Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

· The original tires have built-in tread wear indicators. When the wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced.
· Tires degrade with age and use. Have tires, including the spare, over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury.
· Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. Recommended types and sizes are shown in "Wheels and tires" (P. 9-8).

WARNING
· The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury.
· If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the VDC system and/or interference with the brake discs. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad wear. For additional information on wheel off-set dimensions, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 9-8).

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

· When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
· Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
· The TPMS sensor may be damaged if it is not handled correctly. Be careful when handling the TPMS sensor.
· When replacing the TPMS sensor, the ID registration may be required. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for ID registration.
· Do not use a valve stem cap that is not specified by NISSAN. The valve stem cap may become stuck.
· Be sure that the valve stem caps are correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve may be clogged up with dirt and cause a malfunction or loss of pressure.

· Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning.
· The use of retread tires is not recommended.
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required.
Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage.
SPARE TIRE (TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire) (if so equipped)
When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function.
Observe the following precautions if the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident:

WARNING
· The spare tire should be used for emergency use only. It should be replaced with the standard tire at the first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage.
· Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving.
· Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).
· With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire installed do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
· When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire should be used on the rear wheels and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels).
· Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the standard tire. Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear.

· Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles.
· Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time.
· Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.
CAUTION
· Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle.
· Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

MEMO
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

9 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Fuel information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Recommended SAE viscosity number . . . . . . . . 9-7 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 When traveling or registering in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Tire placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Radio approval number and information . . . . . . . 9-10

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/ LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in Section 8 to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid types

Fuel

Engine oil*1 Drain and refill *1: For additional information, see "Engine oil" (P. 8-7).

With oil filter change
Without oil filter change

Engine coolant with reservoir

Manual transmission
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid

Manual transmission gear oil Multi-purpose grease

Capacity (approximate)

Metric Measure

US Measure

Imperial Measure

47 L

12-3/8 gal

10-3/8 gal

4-1/4 qt

3-1/2 qt

3.8 L

4 qt

3-3/8 qt

6.9 L

1-7/8 gal

1-1/2 gal

7.1 L

1-7/8 gal

1-1/2 gal

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
· For additional information, see "Fuel Information" (P. 9-4).
· Genuine "NISSAN Engine Oil 5W-30 SN" is recommended. · If the above motor oil is not available. use "NISSAN Motor Oil" or equiva-
lent that matches the following grade and viscosity. · Oil grade: API grade SL, SM or SN, ILSAC grade GF-4 or GF-5 · SAE Viscosity: For additional information, see "Recommended SAE
viscosity number" (P. 9-7).
· Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant (blue) or equivalent in its quality · Use Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant or equivalent in its quality, in order to avoid possible aluminum corrosion within the engine cooling system caused by the use of non-genuine engine coolant. Note that any repairs for the incidents within the engine coolant system while using non-genuine engine coolant may not covered by the warranty even if such incidents occurred during the warranty period.
· Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 · Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the warranty.
· Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) Chevron Texaco ETL8997B 75W-80 or equivalent · If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) Chevron Texaco ETL8997B is not available, API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-80 may be used as a temporary replacement. However, use Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) Chevron Texaco ETL8997B as soon as its available.
· NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

9-2 Technical and consumer information

Fluid types Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
Air conditioning system refrigerant
Air conditioning system oil Windshield-washer fluid

Capacity (approximate)

Metric Measure

US Measure

Imperial Measure

Refill to the proper level according to the instructions, see "Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid" (P. 8-10).

-- 2.5 L

-- 5/8 gal

-- 1/2 gal

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
· Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3
For Mexico · HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) Except for Mexico · HFC-134a (R-134a) · For additional information, see "Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations" (P. 9-7). · Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type PAG or equivalent. · For additional information, see "Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations" (P. 9-7). · Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent.

Technical and consumer information 9-3

FUEL INFORMATION
CAUTION
Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the threeway catalyst.
For Mexico Use UNLEADED REGULAR gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).

Except for Mexico
Use UNLEADED REGULAR gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 (RON).

9-4 Technical and consumer information

Fuel economy label (for Argentina only)

LTI2541

Technical and consumer information 9-5

Fuel economy label (for Argentina only)
9-6 Technical and consumer information

LTI2542

Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance. Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.
Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy "spark knock." ("Spark knock" is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, it is recommended that you have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible.
Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY NUMBER
· 5W-30 is preferable.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant, for Mexico HFO-1234yf (R1234yf) or except for Mexico HFC-134a (R-134a), and NISSAN A/C system oil Type PAG or the exact equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil may cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components.

Technical and consumer information 9-7

SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model Type Cylinder arrangement Bore x Stroke Displacement Firing order Idle speed M/T CVT (in "N" position) Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed) CO % at idle Spark plug Spark plug gap (Nominal) Camshaft operation

2.0L 4 cylinder (MR20DD engine model) Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC 4-cylinder, inline mm (in) 84.0 x 90.1 (3.307 x 3.547) cm 3 (cu in) 1,997 (121.86) 1342
No adjustment is necessary.
DXE22H11C mm (in) 1.1 (0.043)
Timing chain

9-8 Technical and consumer information

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel type

Size

Steel

16 x 6.5JJ

Aluminum

16 x 6.5J

17 x 7J

18 x 7.5J

T-type (Steel spare)

16 x 4T

Tire size

205/60R16 215/50R17 215/45R18

Spare tire

T125/70D16

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

M/T

16 inch wheel

CVT

17 inch wheel

CVT

18 inch wheel

M/T

CVT

Offset mm (in) 40 (1.57) 40 (1.57) 48 (1.89) 43 (1.69) 30 (1.18)

Front Track 16 inch wheel 17 inch wheel 18 inch wheel
Rear Track 16 inch wheel 17 inch wheel 18 inch wheel
Wheelbase

Unit: mm (in) 4,640 (182.7) 1,816 (71.5)
1,457 (57.4) 1,456 (57.3) 1,459 (57.4)

Gross vehicle weight rating

M/T

CVT

Gross axle weight rating

M/T

Front

CVT

Rear

M/T

CVT

Unit: mm (in)
1,585 (62.4) 1,570 (61.8) 1,580 (62.2)
1,580 (62.2) 1,565 (61.6) 1,575 (62.0) 2,707 (106.6) Unit: kg (lbs.)
1,775 (3,913) 1,815 (4,001)
940 (2,072) 970 (2,138) 840 (1,852) 850 (1,874)

Technical and consumer information 9-9

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING TIRE PLACARD IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

RADIO APPROVAL NUMBER AND INFORMATION

When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle's engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

LTI0197
The cold tire pressure is shown on the tire placard. The tire placard is located as shown.

LTI2221

9-10 Technical and consumer information

LHA3104

LHA2888

LTI2131

Technical and consumer information 9-11

LTI2543
9-12 Technical and consumer information

LTI2544

LTI2427
The product has been approved for use in Argentina: Continental Automotive GmbH S180144801 CNC ID: H-21947

LTI2427
The product has been approved for use in Argentina: Continental Automotive GmbH S180144803 CNC ID: H-21891

Technical and consumer information 9-13

MEMO
9-14 Technical and consumer information

10 Index

A
Active Ride Control (ARC) . . . . . . . . .5-138 Aiming control, headlights . . . . . . . . .2-57 Air bag (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-49 Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-56 Side and curtain (See supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-64 Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-68, 2-10 Air bag warning light, supplemental . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-68, 2-10 Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-15 Air conditioner Air conditioner operation . . . .4-36, 4-39 Air conditioner system refrigerant recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . .9-7 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 Heater and air conditioner controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34, 4-39 Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . .4-42 Alarm system (See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49 Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . .1-43 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . .5-136 Antifreeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-144 Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
AM radio operation . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52 AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43 AM/FM radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50, 4-52 Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation . . .4-54 Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . .4-62, 4-63 FM radio operation . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53 FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42 USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55, 4-56 USB Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-57 USB interface. . . . . . . . . . . .4-55, 4-56 Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53 Automatic Automatic power window switch . . .2-67 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . .3-21
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-144, 8-12 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Battery replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21 Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21 NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . .8-21
Belt (See drive belt). . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) . . . . . . . . .5-38 Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . .4-62, 4-63 Bluetooth® hands-free phone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-69, 4-73
Bluetooth® connections . . . . . . . .4-85 Connecting procedure . . . . . .4-71, 4-76 Phone indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75 Text messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-81 Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44 Brake Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . .5-136 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-25 Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-135 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Brake wear indicators . . . . . . .2-17, 8-17 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-137 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-135 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-132 Brightness control Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58 Brightness/contrast button. . . . . . . . .4-8 Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . .2-8 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25

C
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-68 Chassis control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-138 Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . .2-29, 2-45 Child restraint with top tether strap . . . .1-43 Child restraints . . . . . . .1-18, 1-19, 1-20, 1-23
Precautions on child restraints . .1-20, 1-24, 1-30, 1-37, 1-39, 1-41, 1-44
Top tether strap anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-5 Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-3 Clock set/adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6 Clock setting (models without Navigation System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48 Clutch Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-144 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . .4-8 Controls Audio controls (steering wheel). . . . .4-66 Heater and air conditioner controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34, 4-39 Coolant Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-7 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-6
10-2

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . .2-5 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-58 Curtain side-impact air bag system (See supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system) . . . . . . . .1-64
D
Daytime Running Light System . . .2-57, 2-58 Defogger Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . .9-9 Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-58 Display controls (see control panel buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14 Driving
Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . .5-144 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Driving with manual transmission . . .5-21 Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Dynamic driver assistance switch . . . . .2-61
E
ECO mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Emergency call (SOS) button . . . . . . . .2-63 Emergency engine shutoff . . . . . . .5-12, 6-2

Engine Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-7 Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-8 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-6 Checking engine oil level. . . . . . . . . .8-7 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . .2-5 Engine cooling system. . . . . . . . . . .8-6 Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7, 9-7 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-9 Engine specifications. . . . . . . . . . . .9-8 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . .2-5 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . .5-4 Explanation of maintenance items . . . . .8-2 Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . .2-64
F
Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 Fluid
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7, 9-7 Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . .8-11 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59

Front air bag system (See supplemental restraint system) . . .1-56 Front and rear sonar system . . . . . . .5-139 Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-4 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Fuel
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7 Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . .9-4 Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19 Fuel-filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19 Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . .2-27, 2-43 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19 Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18 Fusible links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
G
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19 Gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . .2-5 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
H
Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-69, 4-73 Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 Headlight aiming control . . . . . . . . . .2-57 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . .2-52 Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . .2-52 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22 Headlights, aiming control . . . . . . . . .2-57 Heated seat switches . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60 Heated seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60 Heated steering wheel switch . . . . . . .2-60 Heater
Heater and air conditioner controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34, 4-39 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . .4-35, 4-39 Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . .5-139 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
I
Ignition switch Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . .5-10
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 Indicator
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge indicator . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . .3-21 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-58 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2 Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . .2-58 Intelligent Around View Monitor . . . . . .4-17 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) . . . . . . .5-60 Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) . . . . .5-128 Intelligent Emergency Braking . . . .2-11, 5-91

Intelligent Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection . . . . . . . . .2-11, 5-101 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-114 Intelligent Key system
Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 Key operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 Mechanical key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 Remote keyless entry operation . . . .3-10 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . .3-13, 3-14 Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . .3-13, 3-14 Intelligent Lane Intervention . . . . . . . .5-30 Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) . . . . . . .5-138 Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70, 2-71 Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
J
Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9, 8-13
K
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . . .8-21 Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system (See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . .3-10 Keys NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . .3-2, 3-5, 8-21 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
10-3

L
Labels Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-67
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . .5-23 Launch bar menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8 Light
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-68, 2-10 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-25 Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . .2-8 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9 Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-25 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-52 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-52 Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22 Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70, 2-71 Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-12 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28, 2-43 Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . .2-70 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70 Lock Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . .3-5 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . .3-18 Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . .2-27, 2-43 Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . .2-27, 2-43 Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . .2-12
10-4

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28, 2-43
M
Maintenance General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .8-2 Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . .8-3 Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-18 Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . .8-3
Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . .8-2 Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3 Map lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70 Menu button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6 Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-58 Mirror
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . .3-21 Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . .3-22 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21 Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68, 7-3 Moving Object Detection (MOD) . . . . . .4-29
N
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . .3-2, 3-5, 8-21 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . .2-50 NissanConnect® Owner's Manual . . . . . .4-2
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . .9-7 Oil
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-8 Checking engine oil level. . . . . . . . . .8-7 Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7, 9-7 Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 Overheat If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .6-11
P
Parking Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-133
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-69, 4-73 Power
Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63 Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-66 Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-135 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-66 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-135

Precautions Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . .8-3 Precautions on booster seats . .1-20, 1-24, 1-30, 1-37, 1-39, 1-41, 1-44 Precautions on child restraints . .1-20, 1-24, 1-30, 1-37, 1-39, 1-41, 1-44 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-10 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-49 Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
R
Radio Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-68 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47, 4-50
Radio approval number and information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) . . . .2-15, 5-84 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . .5-49 Rear Door Alert . . . . . .2-26, 2-27, 2-42, 2-62 Rear power windows. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66 Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21 RearView Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9 Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . .9-7 Registering a vehicle in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . .3-15, 5-14

S
Safety Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . .3-5 Child seat belts . . . . . . . .1-20, 1-24, 1-30, 1-37, 1-39, 1-41, 1-44
Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3 Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . .1-4 Rear seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Seat belt Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18 Infants and small children . . . . . . . .1-19 Injured person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-10 Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Seat belt extenders. . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-18 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10, 7-3 Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-17 Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-13
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Seats
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Armrests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60 Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3 Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 Seats/floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3 Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50

Security systems Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-49
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . .4-42 Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Shifting
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-17 Side air bag system (See supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-64 Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3 Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . .2-70 SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-67 Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-137 Starting Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9, 8-13 Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Steering Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-135 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20 Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68, 7-3 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-68, 2-10
10-5

Supplemental front impact air bag system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-56 Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels . . . . .1-67 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-49 Supplemental restraint system (Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . .1-49 Supplemental side and curtain side-impact air bag system. . . . . . . . .1-64 Switch Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53 Automatic power window switch . . .2-67 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . .6-2 Headlight aiming control . . . . . . . . .2-57 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-52 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-52 Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-58 Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . .3-4 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . .2-5 Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50 Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 Tire
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4, 8-35

Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32 Tire placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29 Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31 Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29 Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-12 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5 Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . .1-43 Towing 2-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-14 4-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-134 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-134 Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-134 Towing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . .5-134, 6-12 Transmission Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Driving with manual transmission . . .5-21 Travel (See registering a vehicle in another country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 Trunk access through the rear seat . . . .3-19 Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18 Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . . . .3-18 Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58

U
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55, 4-56 Audio file operation . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55
USB/iPod® Charging Ports . . . . . . . . .4-68
V
Variable voltage control system . . . . . .8-14 Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . .9-9 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-137 Vehicle immobilizer system. . . . . . . . .2-50 Vehicle information display . . . . . .2-17, 2-32 Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-49 Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start. . . . .2-50 Voice Prompt Interrupt. . . . . . . . . . . .4-75
W
Warning Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-68, 2-10 Battery charge warning light . . . . . . .2-9 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-9 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . .6-2 Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . .2-27, 2-43 Low fuel warning light . . . . . . .2-27, 2-43 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-12

10-6

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28, 2-43 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-68, 2-10 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-49 Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-67 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Weights (See dimensions and weights) . .9-9 Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9 Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29 When traveling or registering in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65 Locking passengers' windows . . . . .2-66 Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-66 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-66 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Wiper Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .2-51

10-7

GAS STATION INFORMATION

FUEL INFORMATION:
CAUTION
Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the threeway catalyst.
For Mexico
Use UNLEADED REGULAR gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).
Except for Mexico
Use UNLEADED REGULAR gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 (RON).
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:
See "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" (P. 9-2).
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
For additional information, refer to the tire placard.
The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar. For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 8-29).

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 2,000 km (1,200 miles) of vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. For additional information, see "Break-in schedule" (P. 5-132). Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life.

XPP Professional Publisher Acrobat Distiller 11.0 (Windows)